 |
|
| If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader . |
|
|
|
| If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader . |
|
|
| Datasheet File OCR Text: |
| User's Manual ID850QB Ver. 2.80 Integrated Debugger Operation Target Device V850 Series Document No. U16973EJ1V0UM00 (1st edition) Date Published February 2004 CP(K) (c) NEC Electronics Corporation 2004 Printed in Japan [MEMO] 2 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Windows and WindowsNT are either a registered trademark or a trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 3 These commodities, technology or software, must be exported in accordance with the export administration regulations of the exporting country. Diversion contrary to the law of that country is prohibited. * The information in this document is current as of January, 2004. The information is subject to change without notice. For actual design-in, refer to the latest publications of NEC Electronics data sheets or data books, etc., for the most up-to-date specifications of NEC Electronics products. Not all products and/or types are available in every country. Please check with an NEC Electronics sales representative for availability and additional information. * No part of this document may be copied or reproduced in any form or by any means without the prior written consent of NEC Electronics. NEC Electronics assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document. * NEC Electronics does not assume any liability for infringement of patents, copyrights or other intellectual property rights of third parties by or arising from the use of NEC Electronics products listed in this document or any other liability arising from the use of such products. No license, express, implied or otherwise, is granted under any patents, copyrights or other intellectual property rights of NEC Electronics or others. * Descriptions of circuits, software and other related information in this document are provided for illustrative purposes in semiconductor product operation and application examples. The incorporation of these circuits, software and information in the design of a customer's equipment shall be done under the full responsibility of the customer. NEC Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by customers or third parties arising from the use of these circuits, software and information. * While NEC Electronics endeavors to enhance the quality, reliability and safety of NEC Electronics products, customers agree and acknowledge that the possibility of defects thereof cannot be eliminated entirely. To minimize risks of damage to property or injury (including death) to persons arising from defects in NEC Electronics products, customers must incorporate sufficient safety measures in their design, such as redundancy, fire-containment and anti-failure features. * NEC Electronics products are classified into the following three quality grades: "Standard", "Special" and "Specific". The "Specific" quality grade applies only to NEC Electronics products developed based on a customerdesignated "quality assurance program" for a specific application. The recommended applications of an NEC Electronics product depend on its quality grade, as indicated below. Customers must check the quality grade of each NEC Electronics product before using it in a particular application. "Standard": Computers, office equipment, communications equipment, test and measurement equipment, audio and visual equipment, home electronic appliances, machine tools, personal electronic equipment and industrial robots. "Special": Transportation equipment (automobiles, trains, ships, etc.), traffic control systems, anti-disaster systems, anti-crime systems, safety equipment and medical equipment (not specifically designed for life support). "Specific": Aircraft, aerospace equipment, submersible repeaters, nuclear reactor control systems, life support systems and medical equipment for life support, etc. The quality grade of NEC Electronics products is "Standard" unless otherwise expressly specified in NEC Electronics data sheets or data books, etc. If customers wish to use NEC Electronics products in applications not intended by NEC Electronics, they must contact an NEC Electronics sales representative in advance to determine NEC Electronics' willingness to support a given application. (Note) (1) "NEC Electronics" as used in this statement means NEC Electronics Corporation and also includes its majority-owned subsidiaries. (2) "NEC Electronics products" means any product developed or manufactured by or for NEC Electronics (as defined above). M8E 02. 11-1 4 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Regional Information Some information contained in this document may vary from country to country. Before using any NEC Electronics product in your application, pIease contact the NEC Electronics office in your country to obtain a list of authorized representatives and distributors. They will verify: * * * * * Device availability Ordering information Product release schedule Availability of related technical literature Development environment specifications (for example, specifications for third-party tools and components, host computers, power plugs, AC supply voltages, and so forth) Network requirements * In addition, trademarks, registered trademarks, export restrictions, and other legal issues may also vary from country to country. [GLOBAL SUPPORT] http://www.necel.com/en/support/support.html NEC Electronics America, Inc. (U.S.) Santa Clara, California Tel: 408-588-6000 800-366-9782 NEC Electronics (Europe) GmbH Duesseldorf, Germany Tel: 0211-65030 * Sucursal en Espana NEC Electronics Hong Kong Ltd. Hong Kong Tel: 2886-9318 NEC Electronics Hong Kong Ltd. Seoul Branch Seoul, Korea Tel: 02-558-3737 Madrid, Spain Tel: 091-504 27 87 * Succursale Francaise Velizy-Villacoublay, France Tel: 01-30-67 58 00 * Filiale Italiana NEC Electronics Shanghai Ltd. Shanghai, P.R. China Tel: 021-5888-5400 Milano, Italy Tel: 02-66 75 41 * Branch The Netherlands NEC Electronics Taiwan Ltd. Taipei, Taiwan Tel: 02-2719-2377 Eindhoven, The Netherlands Tel: 040-244 58 45 * Tyskland Filial NEC Electronics Singapore Pte. Ltd. Novena Square, Singapore Tel: 6253-8311 Taeby, Sweden Tel: 08-63 80 820 * United Kingdom Branch Milton Keynes, UK Tel: 01908-691-133 J04.1 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 5 [MEMO] 6 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM PREFACE Target Readers This manual is intended for user engineers who design and develop application systems of the V850 Series. Purpose This manual is intended for users to understand the functions of the ID850QB in the organization below. Organization This manual consists of the following chapters: * OVERVIEW * INSTALLATION * STARTING AND TERMINATING * ASSOCIATION WITH PM plus * DEBAG FUNCTIONS * WINDOW REFERENCE * COMMAND REFERENCE How to Use This Manual It is assumed that the readers of this manual have general knowledge of electrical engineering, logic circuits, microcontrollers, C language, and assemblers. To understand the functions of the V850 Series Refer to Hardware User's Manual for each product.. To understand the instruction functions of the V850 Series Refer to V850ES Architecture User's Manual (U15943E) or V850E1 Architecture User's Manual (U14559E). Conventions Data significance: Note: Caution: Remark: Numerical representation: Higher digits on the left and lower digits on the right Footnote for item marked with Note in the text Information requiring particular attention Supplementary information Binary ... XXXX or XXXXB Decimal ... XXXX Hexadecimal ... 0xXXXX Prefix indicating the power of 2 (address space, memory capacity): K (Kilo): 2 10 20 = 1024 = 1024 2 M (Mega): 2 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 7 Related Documents Refer to the documents listed below when using this manual. The related documents indicated in this publication may include preliminary versions. However, preliminary versions are not marked as such. Documents related to development tools (User's Manuals) Document Name IE-703002-MC (In-circuit emulator for V853, V850/SA1, V850/SB1, V850/SB2, V850/SC1, V850/SC2, V850/SC3, V850/SF1, V850/SV1) IE-V850E-MC (In-circuit emulator for V850E/IA1, V850E/IA2), IE-V850E-MC-A (In-circuit emulator for V850E/MA1, V850E/MA2) IE-V850E1-CD-NW(PCNCIA Card Type On-Chip Debug Emulator) IE-703003-MC-EM1 (In-circuit emulator option board for V853) IE-703017-MC-EM1 (In-circuit emulator option board for V850/SA1) IE-703037-MC-EM1 (In-circuit emulator option board for V850/SB1, V850/SB2) IE-703040-MC-EM1 (In-circuit emulator option board for V850/SV1) IE-703079-MC-EM1 (In-circuit emulator option board for V850/SF1) IE-703102-MC (In-circuit emulator for V850E/MS1, V850E/MS2) IE-703102-MC-EM1, IE-703102-MC-EM1-A (In-circuit emulator option board for V850E/MS1, V850E/MS2) IE-703107-MC-EM1 (In-circuit emulator option board for V850E/MA1) IE-703116-MC-EM1 (In-circuit emulator option board for V850E/IA1) CA850 Ver. 2.50 C Compiler Package Operation C Language PM plus Assembly Language ID850 Ver. 2.50 Integrated Debugger ID850NW Ver. 2.51 Integrated Debugger ID850NWC Ver. 2.51 Integrated Debugger ID850QB Ver. 2.80 Integrated Debugger SM850 Ver. 2.50 System Simulator SM850 Ver. 2.00 or Later System Simulator RX850 Ver. 3.13 or Later Real-Time OS Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation External Part User Open Interface Specifications Basics Installation Technical RX850 Pro Ver. 3.13 Real-Time OS Fundamental Installation Technical RD850 Ver. 3.01 Task Debugger RD850 Pro Ver. 3.01 Task Debugger AZ850 Ver. 3.10 System Performance Analyzer PG-FP4 Flash Memory Programmer Document No. U11595E U14487E U16647E U11596E U12898E U14151E U14337E U15447E U13875E U13876E U14481E U14700E U16053E U16054E U16055E U16042E U16217E U16454E U16525E This manual U16218E U14873E U13430E U13410E U13431E U13773E U13774E U13772E U13737E U13916E U14410E U15260E 8 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW ... 18 1. 1 Features ... 19 1. 1. 1 New functions, enhanced functions ... 19 1. 1. 2 Other ... 20 1. 2 System Configuration ... 21 1. 3 Operating Environment ... 22 1. 3. 1 Hardware environment ... 22 1. 3. 2 Software environment ... 22 1. 4 Cautions During Debugging ... 23 1. 4. 1 When performing source level debugging ... 23 1. 4. 2 Security ID ... 23 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION ... 24 2. 1 Installing ... 24 2. 2 Uninstalling ... 24 CHAPTER 3 STARTING AND TERMINATING ... 25 3. 1 Cautions Before Starting (When N-Wire CARD connected) ... 25 3. 2 Startup Option and Argument Specification ... 26 3. 2. 1 Specification method ... 26 3. 2. 2 Specification format and options ... 27 3. 3 Starting ... 28 3. 4 Terminating ... 29 3. 5 Error Messages at Start up ... 30 CHAPTER 4 ASSOCIATION WITH PM plus ... 32 4. 1 Setting Build Mode ... 32 4. 2 Registering Debugger to PM plus Project ... 33 4. 2. 1 Selecting debugger ... 33 4. 2. 2 Downloading multiple load module files ... 33 4. 3 To Start ID850QB from PM plus ... 35 4. 3. 1 Restoring debugging environment ... 35 4. 4 Auto Load ... 36 4. 4. 1 Auto load by correcting source code ... 36 4. 4. 2 Auto load by starting debugger ... 36 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION ... 37 5. 1 Setting debugging environment ... 38 5. 1. 1 Setting operating environment ... 38 5. 1. 2 Option settings ... 38 5. 1. 3 Mapping settings ... 38 5. 1. 4 To change the value of a register required for access of an external memory ... 39 5. 2 Download Function / Upload Function ... 40 5. 2. 1 Download ... 40 5. 2. 2 Upload ... 41 5. 3 Source Display, Disassemble Display Function ... 42 5. 3. 1 Source display ... 42 5. 3. 2 Disassemble display ... 42 5. 3. 3 Mixed display mode (Source window) ... 43 5. 3. 4 Convert symbol (Symbol to Address) ... 44 5. 4 Break Function ... 45 5. 4. 1 Break Types ... 45 5. 4. 2 Breakpoint setting ... 46 5. 4. 3 Setting break to variable ... 47 5. 4. 4 Hardware break and software break ... 48 5. 4. 5 Fail-safe break ... 49 5. 5 Program Execution Function ... 50 5. 6 Watch Function ... 52 5. 6. 1 Displaying and changing data value ... 52 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 9 5. 6. 2 Displaying and changing local variable values ... 53 5. 6. 3 Registering and deleting watch data ... 53 5. 6. 4 Changing watch data ... 54 5. 6. 5 Temporarily displaying and changing data values ... 54 5. 6. 6 Toolbar watch function ... 54 5. 6. 7 Stack trace display function ... 55 5. 7 Memory Manipulation Function ... 56 5. 7. 1 Displaying and changing memory contents ... 56 5. 7. 2 Filling, copying, and comparing memory contents ... 56 5. 7. 3 Modifying memory contents (DMM function) ... 57 5. 7. 4 Access monitor function (when IECUBE connected) ... 58 5. 7. 5 Flash Memory Writing Function (When N-Wire CARD connected) ... 58 5. 8 Register Manipulation Function ... 59 5. 8. 1 Displaying and changing register contents ... 59 5. 8. 2 Displaying and changing peripheral I/O registers contents ... 59 5. 8. 3 Displaying and changing I/O port contents ... 60 5. 9 Timer Function ... 61 5. 9. 1 Timer event conditions ... 61 5. 9. 2 Run-Break event ... 62 5. 10 Trace Function (When IECUBE Connected) ... 63 5. 10. 1 Trace memory ... 63 5. 10. 2 Setting trace data ... 64 5. 10. 3 Checking trace data ... 64 5. 10. 4 Mixed display mode (Trace window) ... 65 5. 10. 5 Tracer Operation ... 65 5. 10. 6 Setting conditional trace ... 66 5. 11 Event function ... 67 5. 11. 1 Using event function ... 67 5. 11. 2 Creating events ... 68 5. 11. 3 Setting event conditions ... 68 5. 11. 4 Number of enabled events for each event condition ... 70 5. 11. 5 Managing events ... 71 5. 12 The real-time RAM monitor function ... 72 5. 12. 1 Sampling range setting ... 72 5. 12. 2 Sampling time setting ... 72 5. 12. 3 RAM monitor function ... 73 5. 13 Load/Save Function ... 74 5. 13. 1 Debugging environment (project file) ... 74 5. 13. 2 Window display information (view file) ... 76 5. 13. 3 Window setting information (setting file) ... 77 5. 14 Functions Common to Various Windows ... 78 5. 14. 1 Active Status and Static Status ... 78 5. 14. 2 Jump function ... 79 5. 14. 3 Trace Result with Linking Window (when IECUBE connected) ... 80 5. 14. 4 Drag & drop function ... 81 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE ... 84 6. 1 Window List ... 84 6. 2 Explanation of Windows ... 87 Main window ... 88 Configuration dialog box ... 100 Extended Option dialog box ... 108 Fail-safe Break dialog box ... 114 RRM dialog box ... 116 Debugger Option dialog box ... 119 Project File Save dialog box ... 126 Project File Load dialog box ... 128 Download dialog box ... 130 Upload dialog box ... 133 Load Module List dialog box ... 135 Source window ... 137 Source Search dialog box ... 142 Source Text move dialog box ... 144 10 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Assemble window ... 146 Assemble Search dialog box ... 150 Address move dialog box ... 152 Symbol To Address dialog box ... 153 Watch window ... 155 Quick Watch dialog box ... 160 Add Watch dialog box ... 163 Change Watch dialog box ... 166 Local Variable window ... 168 Stack Trace window ... 171 Memory window ... 175 Memory Search dialog box ... 179 Memory Fill dialog box ... 182 Memory Copy dialog box ... 184 Memory Compare dialog box ... 186 Memory Compare Result dialog box ... 188 DMM dialog box ... 190 Register window ... 192 Register Select dialog box ... 195 IOR window ... 197 IOR Select dialog box ... 201 Add I/O Port dialog box ... 204 Timer dialog box ... 207 Timer Result dialog box ... 211 Trace window ... 212 Trace Search dialog box ... 217 Trace Data Select dialog box ... 222 Trace move dialog box ... 224 Trace dialog box ... 226 Delay Count dialog box ... 229 Event Manager ... 231 Software Break Manager ... 236 Event dialog box ... 239 Event Link dialog box ... 244 Break dialog box ... 247 View File Save dialog box ... 249 View File Load dialog box ... 252 Environment Setting File Save dialog box ... 254 Environment Setting File Load dialog box ... 256 Reset Debugger dialog box ... 258 Exit Debugger dialog box ... 259 About dialog box ... 260 Console window ... 262 Font dialog box ... 263 Browse dialog box ... 265 CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE ... 267 7. 1 Command Line Rules ... 267 7. 2 Command List ... 268 7. 3 List of Variables ... 270 7. 4 List of Packages ... 270 7. 5 Key Bind ... 271 7. 6 Expansion window ... 271 7. 7 Callback Procedure ... 271 7. 8 Hook Procedure ... 272 7. 9 Related Files ... 273 7. 10 Cautions ... 273 7. 11 Explanation of Commands ... 274 address ... 275 assemble ... 276 batch ... 277 breakpoint ... 278 cache ... 280 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 11 dbgexit ... 281 dbgopt ... 282 download ... 283 erase ... 284 extwin ... 285 finish ... 286 flop ... 287 go ... 288 help ... 289 hook ... 290 ie ... 291 inspect ... 292 jump ... 293 map ... 294 mdi ... 295 memory ... 296 module ... 297 next ... 298 refresh ... 299 register ... 300 reset ... 301 run ... 302 step ... 303 stop ... 304 upload ... 305 version ... 306 watch ... 307 where ... 308 wish ... 309 xtime ... 310 xtrace ... 311 7. 12 Samples (Calculator Script) ... 312 APPENDIX A EXPANSION WINDOW ... 313 A. 1 Overview ... 313 A. 2 Sample List of Expansion Window ... 313 A. 3 Activation ... 313 A. 4 Explanation of each sample window ... 313 List window ... 314 Grep window ... 315 RRM window ... 316 Hook window ... 317 Memory Mapped I/O window ... 319 Memory Mapped I/O dialog box ... 320 APPENDIX B N-WIRE CHECKER ... 321 B. 1 Overview ... 321 B. 1. 1 Kind of test ... 322 B. 2 Operation ... 322 B. 3 Explanation of each area and button ... 324 B. 4 Corrective Actions in Case of NG ... 326 B. 4. 1 NG in N-Wire Emulator test ... 326 B. 4. 2 NG in DCK waveform test ... 327 B. 5 Restrictions ... 328 APPENDIX C INPUT CONVENTIONS ... 329 C. 1 Usable Character Set ... 329 C. 2 Symbols ... 330 C. 3 Numeric Values ... 331 C. 4 Expressions and Operators ... 331 APPENDIX D KEY FUNCTION LIST ... 334 12 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM APPENDIX E MESSAGES ... 337 E. 1 Display Format ... 337 E. 2 Types of Messages ... 337 E. 3 Message Lists ... 338 APPENDIX F INDEX ... 361 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 13 LIST OF FIGURES Figure No 1-1 1-2 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 4-1 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-6 5-7 5-8 5-9 5-10 5-11 5-12 5-13 5-14 5-15 5-16 5-17 5-18 5-19 5-20 5-21 5-22 5-23 5-24 5-25 5-26 5-27 6-1 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-5 6-6 6-7 6-8 6-9 6-10 6-11 6-12 6-13 6-14 6-15 6-16 6-17 6-18 6-19 6-20 6-21 6-22 6-23 6-24 Title, Page Example of ID850QB System Configuration (IECUBE) ... 21 Example of ID850QB System Configuration (N-Wire CARD) ... 21 Startup Option ... 26 Configuration Dialog Box ... 28 Main Window (Startup) ... 29 Exit Debugger Dialog Box ... 29 [Debugger Settings] Dialog Box (PM plus) ... 34 Breakpoint Setting ... 46 Setting Break to Variable ... 47 Management of Software Breaks ... 48 Fail-safe Break Setting ... 49 Execution Button ... 50 [Run] Menu ... 50 Watch Window ... 52 Specification of the Display Format (Debugger Option dialog box) ... 52 Local Variable Window ... 53 Change Watch Dialog Box ... 54 Quick Watch dialog box ... 54 Stack Trace Window ... 55 Displaying and Changing Memory Contents ... 56 Modifying Memory Contents (DMM Dialog Box) ... 57 Access Monitor function (Memory Window) ... 58 Absolute Name/Function Name Switching ... 59 Displaying peripheral I/O registers Contents ... 59 Register I/O Port ... 60 Sets and DisplaysTimer Event (Timer Dialog Box) ... 61 Trace Data Settings (The Extended Option Dialog Dox) ... 64 Checking Trace Data ... 64 Setting of Various Event Conditions ... 68 Managing Events (the Event Manager) ... 71 Sampling Range Setting (RRM Dialog Box) ... 72 Sampling Time Setting ... 72 RAM Monitor Function Setting ... 73 Automatic Save/Automatic Load Setting for Project File ... 74 Main Window ... 88 Toolbar (Picture Only) ... 97 Toolbar (Picture and Text) ... 97 Status Bar ... 97 Configuration Dialog Box (When IECUBE connected) ... 100 Configuration Dialog Box (When N-Wire CARD connected) ... 101 Extended Option Dialog Box ... 108 Fail-safe Break dialog box ... 114 RRM dialog box ... 116 Debugger Option Dialog Box ... 119 Add Source Path Dialog Box ... 120 Project File Save Dialog Box ... 126 Project File Load Dialog Box ... 128 Download Dialog Box ... 130 The Progress of Download ... 130 Upload Dialog Box ... 133 Load Module List Dialog Box ... 135 Source window ... 137 Source Search Dialog Box ... 142 Source Text Move Dialog Box ... 144 Assemble window ... 146 Assemble Search Dialog Box ... 150 Address Move Dialog Box (Example: When Memory Window Is Open) ... 152 Symbol To Address Dialog Box ... 153 14 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 6-25 6-26 6-27 6-28 6-29 6-30 6-31 6-32 6-33 6-34 6-35 6-36 6-37 6-38 6-39 6-40 6-41 6-42 6-43 6-44 6-45 6-46 6-47 6-48 6-49 6-50 6-51 6-52 6-53 6-54 6-55 6-56 6-57 6-58 6-59 6-60 6-61 6-62 6-63 6-64 6-65 6-66 6-67 7-1 A-1 A-2 A-3 A-4 A-5 A-6 B-1 B-2 E-1 Watch Window ... 155 Quick Watch Dialog Box ... 160 Add Watch Dialog Box ... 163 Change Watch Dialog Box ... 166 Local Variable Window ... 168 Stack Trace Window ... 171 Memory Window ... 175 Memory Window (When "5. 12 The real-time RAM monitor function" Selected) ... 175 Memory Search Dialog Box ... 179 Memory Fill Dialog Box ... 182 Memory Copy Dialog Box ... 184 Memory Compare Dialog Box ... 186 Memory Compare Result Dialog Box ... 188 DMM Dialog Box ... 190 Register Window ... 192 Register Select Dialog Box ... 195 IOR Window ... 197 IOR Select Dialog Box ... 201 Add I/O Port Dialog Box ... 204 Timer Dialog Box ... 207 Timer Result Dialog Box ... 211 Trace Window ... 212 Trace Search Dialog Box ... 217 Trace Data Select Dialog Box ... 222 Trace Move Dialog Box ... 224 Trace Dialog Box ... 226 Delay Count Dialog Box ... 229 Event Manager (In detailed display mode) ... 231 Select Display Information Dialog Box ... 235 Software Break Manager ... 236 Event Dialog Box ... 239 Event Link Dialog Box ... 244 Break Dialog Box ... 247 View File Save Dialog Box ... 249 View File Load Dialog Box ... 252 Environment Setting File Save Dialog Box ... 254 Environment Setting File Load Dialog Box ... 256 Reset Debugger Dialog Box ... 258 Exit Debugger Dialog Box ... 259 About Dialog Box ... 260 Console Window ... 262 Font Dialog Box ... 263 Browse Dialog Box ... 265 Execution Screen ... 312 List window ... 314 Grep window ... 315 RRM window ... 316 Hook window ... 317 Memory Mapped I/O window ... 319 Memory Mapped I/O dialog box ... 320 N-Wire Checker ... 321 Waveform of N-Wire Checker ... 323 Error/Warning Messages ... 337 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 15 LIST OF TABLE Title No. 2-1 3-1 3-2 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-6 5-7 5-8 5-9 5-10 5-11 5-12 5-13 5-14 5-15 5-16 5-17 5-18 5-19 5-20 5-21 5-22 6-1 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-5 6-6 6-7 6-8 6-9 6-10 6-11 6-12 6-13 6-14 6-15 6-16 6-17 6-18 6-19 6-20 6-21 6-22 6-23 6-24 6-25 7-1 7-2 7-3 A-1 B-1 C-1 C-2 C-3 Title, Page Install ... 24 Startup Options ... 27 Execution File ... 27 Debug Function List (Flow of Debugging Operations) ... 37 Details of Mapping Attributes ... 38 Type of File That Can Be Downloaded ... 40 Type of File That Can Be Uploaded ... 41 File Type Can Be Displayed ... 42 Specifying Symbols ... 44 Break Types ... 45 The Number of Valid Software Break ... 48 Type of Execution ... 50 Trace memory size ... 63 Type of Trace Modes ... 65 Types of Tracer Control Mode ... 66 Types of Conditional Trace ... 66 Various Event Conditions ... 67 Number of enabled events for each event condition ... 70 Event icon ... 71 Contents Saved to Project File ... 75 Type of the View Files ... 76 Type of the Setting Files ... 77 Details of Jump Source Address ... 79 Details of Drag & Drop Function (Line/Address) ... 82 Details of Drag & Drop Function (Character String) ... 82 Window List ... 84 CPU status ... 98 IE status ... 98 Break Cause ... 98 Range and Unit of Internal ROM/RAM Setting ... 102 Type of Mapping Attribute ... 106 Mapping Unit ... 106 Relationship Between Division Ratio and Maximum Measurement Time (Time Tag Counter (Trace)) ... 109 Relationship Between Meaning of Trace Data to Be Collected and Trace Collection Mode ... 110 Relationship Between Division Ratio and Maximum Measurement Time (Timer Count (Timer)) ... 111 Event Setting Status (Event Mark) ... 138 Watch Window Display Format (Symbol) ... 156 Watch Window Display Format (Data) ... 157 Watch Window Input Format ... 164 How a Variable Is Handled When a Scope Is Specified ... 164 Measurable Values ... 209 Settable Range of Address Condition (Trace) ... 219 Frame Number Specification Format ... 225 Number of Events Settable ... 228 Separator for Displaying Event Details ... 232 Status condition ... 240 Settable Range of Address Condition (Event) ... 242 Settable Range of Data Condition ... 242 The Number of Event Conditions in Event Link Dialog Box ... 246 Number of Events Settable in Break Condition Setting Area ... 248 ID850QBList of Debugger Control Commands ... 268 List of Console/Tcl Commands ... 270 Message ID ... 272 List of Expansion Window (Sample) ... 313 Errors of N-Wire Checker ... 326 List of Character Set ... 329 List of Special Characters ... 329 Input Format of Numeric Values ... 331 16 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM C-4 C-5 C-6 D-1 E-1 List of Operators ... 332 Operator Priority ... 333 Range of Radixes ... 333 Key Function List ... 334 Types of Messages ... 337 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 17 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW The Integrated Debugger ID850QB for the V850 Series (hereafter referred to as the ID850QB) is a software tool developed for NEC Electronics V850 Series of microcontrollers for embedded control. This software tool is intended to enable efficient debugging of user programs. This chapter explains the following items regarding the ID850QB. - Features - System Configuration - Operating Environment - Cautions During Debugging 18 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1. 1 Features The ID850QB has the following features: - New functions, enhanced functions - Other 1. 1. 1 New functions, enhanced functions (1) Enhanced RRM function (when IECUBE connected) Division setting for the sampling range of the real-time RAM monitor area is now possible (refer to "5. 12 The real-time RAM monitor function"). Up to 8 locations can be set in 256-byte units in the 2 KB RRM area of the ID850QB. Moreover, in the Memory window, the access status (read, write, read & write) can be displayed in different colors using this function. This can also be used as a simple coverage function. (2) Enhanced timer function (when IECUBE connected) Using an external clock of 50 MHz, measurement of up to 7 segments + Run-Break time (time from program execution start until break) is possible (refer to "5. 9 Timer Function"). Other than during Run-Break, the maximum time, minimum time, pass count, and average time are displayed. Measured time display during user program execution and time-over break are supported. (3) Fail-safe break support (when IECUBE connected) In addition to the traditional guarded areas and I/O register areas, fail-safe break is also supported for the guarded areas of internal ROM/internal RAM (refer to "5. 4. 5 Fail-safe break"). (4) Enhanced command function Script file specification is possible at ID startup (refer to "3. 2 Startup Option and Argument Specification"). Testing can be done with 1 click by specifying a project file at the same time as the script file. The Tcl/Tk core was updated to the latest version 8.4. (5) Settings during program execution (when IECUBE connected) Timer event conditions and trace event conditions can now be set during user program execution. (6) Support of both IECUBE and N-Wire CARD Two emulators (IECUBE, N-Wire CARD) can be connected with 1 debugger (ID850QB) (refer to "1. 2 System Configuration"). In the case of IECUBE, USB2.0 is supported for the first time by NEC Electronics. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 19 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW (7) Trace complementation function (when IECUBE connected) This function performs complementary display of instructions between branch instructions that cannot be traced by the hardware (refer to "5. 10. 2 Setting trace data"). Complementation/non-complementation can be selected. In the complementation mode, assemble display in the internal ROM area is possible even during program execution (while the tracer is stopped). (8) Hardware detailed version display The hardware detailed version is displayed in the About dialog box. The version can also be confirmed in the Configuration dialog box prior to startup, and the display information can be copied and pasted. Pasting to support mail is now easy. 1. 1. 2 Other (1) Using function of in-circuit emulator By using the event setting function of an in-circuit emulator, break events can be set, the user program can be traced, and time can be measured, and so on (refer to "5. 11 Event function"). (2) Support of on-chip debugging (when N-Wire CARD connected) (3) Flash memory writing function (when N-Wire CARD connected) The internal flash memory can be written and the load module can be downloaded by the same access method as an ordinary memory operation (refer to "5. 7. 5 Flash Memory Writing Function (When N-Wire CARD connected)"). (4) Security function (when N-Wire CARD connected) The ID code stored in the internal ROM or internal flash memory of a product with a security unit can be authenticated (refer to " Configuration dialog box"). (5) Function expansion through Tcl The batch processing and hook processing, and the creation of original user custom windows are possible using the command line with Tcl/Tk (Tool Command Language) (refer to "CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE", "APPENDIX A EXPANSION WINDOW"). (6) Function expansion through TIP or ToolLink By associating with a task debugger (RD) and system performance analyzer (AZ) supporting TIP (Tool Interface Protocol) or ToolLink, the debugging efficiency of the user program using a real-time OS (RX) can be dramatically improved. 20 Nx85E901 RCU0 RCU1 is provided. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM A debugging function implemented by the on-chip debug unit of the Nx85ET RCU0+TEU+TRCU , CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1. 2 System Configuration The ID850QB can be connected to the following two types of emulators. As a result, user programs developed for the V850 Series and a pleasant debugging environment for target systems are provided. (1) IECUBE (in-circuit emulator) The IECUBE can be manipulated from the ID850QB by connected it to the ID850QB via a USB cable. Figure 1-1 Example of ID850QB System Configuration (IECUBE) Host machine (2) N-Wire CARD (on-chip debug emulator) The N-Wire CARD, a PC card emulator, can be manipulated from the ID850QB by directly inserting it to the host machine. The N-Wire CARD can provide debugging functions by connecting it to a target system on which the V850ES incorporating an RCU (Run Control Unit) and the V850E1 are mounted. Figure 1-2 Example of ID850QB System Configuration (N-Wire CARD) Host machine N-Wire CARD Target system (on which microcontroller incorporating RCU is mounted) USB1.1/2.0 IECUBE Target system User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 21 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1. 3 Operating Environment This section explains the following items regarding the operating environment. - Hardware environment - Software environment 1. 3. 1 Hardware environment (1) Host machine The machine by which the target OS operates Caution When the N-Wire CARD is connected, because it is assumed that the IECUBE is used with a notebook PC, the host machine must have a PC card slot (TYPEII). (2) In-circuit emulator (any of the following) - IECUBE - N-Wire CARD (IE-V850E1-CD-NW) 1. 3. 2 Software environment (1) OS (any of the following) Windows98, Windows2000, Windows NT4.0 (Service Pack6 or above)Note, WindowsMe, WindowsXP Home Edition, WindowsXP Professional Edition Note Caution Can be used only when N-Wire CARD is connected. Regardless of which of the OS above is used, we recommend that the latest Service Pack is installed. (2) Device file (Individual acquisition) - The device file of the target device to be used. This file is available from the following Web site of NEC Electronics. http://www.necel.com/micro 22 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1. 4 Cautions During Debugging The cautions to be observed during debugging are described below. - When performing source level debugging - Security ID 1. 4. 1 When performing source level debugging The object file for which source level debugging is performed must include symbol information or other information for debugging (debugging information). Therefore, perform the following processing during source file compiling. (1) When using PM plus Specify [Debug Bild] when the Build mode is selected. (2) When using CA850 on standalone basis Add the -g option. 1. 4. 2 Security ID The object file used when N-Wire CARD is connected must include the security ID information. For the security ID850QB settings, refer to "CA850 C Compiler Package Manipulation". For details about the security ID, refer to the N-Wire CARD user's manual. The security ID (ID code) from the ID850QB is specified in the Configuration dialog box. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 23 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION This chapter explains the following items about installation of ID850QB. - Installing - Uninstalling 2. 1 Installing The following items must be installed, when the ID850QB is used. Table 2-1 Install Item ID850QBsystem disk Used device file Install the contents of this disk according to the automatically executed installer. Install this file according to the DFINST.exe dedicated startup installer by selecting [Start] menu -> [Program] -> [NEC Tools32] -> [Device File Installer]. Caution 1 To install the ID850QB again after the ID850QB has been installed once, be sure to uninstall the ID850QB. If the ID850QB is installed in a directory different from that, without uninstalling, the ID850QB that has already been installed cannot be uninstalled. Caution 2 When ID850NWC is already installed, ID850QB cannot be installed in the same machine. case, uninstall ID850NWC before installing ID850QB. In this 2. 2 Uninstalling Perform uninstall using [Add/Remove Programs] in the Control Panel. 24 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Procedure CHAPTER 3 STARTING AND TERMINATING CHAPTER 3 STARTING AND TERMINATING This chapter explains the procedure of starting and terminating the ID850QB. - Cautions Before Starting (When N-Wire CARD connected) - Startup Option and Argument Specification - Starting - Terminating - Error Messages at Start up 3. 1 Cautions Before Starting (When N-Wire CARD connected) When the N-Wire CARD is connected, start the N-Wire Checker before the starting the ID850QB to check that the in-circuit emulator and the target system can be normally debugged. CHECKER".) Caution For the connection between the in-circuit emulator and the target system and the power application sequence, refer to "IE-V850E1-CD-NW User's Manual". Incorrect connection may damage the incircuit emulator and the target system. (Refer to "APPENDIX B N-WIRE User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 25 CHAPTER 3 STARTING AND TERMINATING 3. 2 Startup Option and Argument Specification The procedure for specifying the startup options and arguments for the ID850QB is described below. By specifying the startup options and arguments, it is possible to specify the script file at startup and the project file. Remark When starting up the ID850QB from PM plus, the startup option and argument settings are performed in [Debugger Settings...] in the Tool Menu of PM plus (refer to "CHAPTER 4 ASSOCIATION WITH PM plus"). The debugger startup option can be set to the option column. 3. 2. 1 1) Specification method Create an ID850QB shortcut on the desktop. The ID850QB execution file (*.exe) is located in the bin folder in the folder to which the installation was 2) Open the properties of the created shortcut and after the execution file name displayed in [Target:], specify the option and argument (refer to "3. 2. 2 Specification format and options"). Figure 3-1 Startup Option 26 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM performed (refer to "Table 3-2 Execution File"). CHAPTER 3 STARTING AND TERMINATING 3. 2. 2 Specification format and options (1) Specification format xxx.exe ?options? xxx.exe ?options? project Each option and argument is separated by a space. No distinction is made between uppercase and lowercase in the character string. Arguments enclosed between '?' can be omitted. When a project file is specified, that project file is read at startup. However, during PM plus startup, the project file specification is ignored. (2) Specification options The following options can be specified. Options /SC /SCRIPT:script file name Change background color of window to system color. Specify the script file to be executed at startup. (3) Specification example Example 1) Specification of script file only xxx.exe /script:c:/work/script.tcl Example 2) Specification of script file and project file xxx.exe /script:c:/work/script.tcl c:/work/project.prj Caution Make the script file (*.tcl file) name excluding the extension different from the load module file name and project file name. In the case of this example, do not place a file named project.tcl in c:/work. (4) Execution file Execution files and names displayed from the [Start] menu are as follows. Table 3-2 Execution File Connected IE IECUBE, N-Wire CARD Execution file id850g32.exe ID850QB User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Table 3-1 Startup Options Meaning Name ([Start] Menu) 27 CHAPTER 3 STARTING AND TERMINATING 3. 3 1) Starting ID850QB startup is executed from the [Start] menu or by clicking the shortcut created on the desktop. Start the ID850QB, the Configuration dialog box will be opened. Caution In this case, the Configuration dialog box should not be displayed, but an error message should be displayed, please cope with it with reference to "3. 5 Error Messages at Start up" . Figure 3-2 Configuration Dialog Box 2) Set the items related to the operating environment of the ID850QB in the Configuration dialog box. After setting each item, click the 28 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 3 STARTING AND TERMINATING 3) The Main window will be opened and the ID850QB can be operated. Mainly use this window for debugging. Figure 3-3 Main Window (Startup) 3. 4 1) Terminating Select [File] menu-> [Exit] on the Main window. The following the Exit Debugger dialog box will be opened: (An execution stop confirmation message is displayed when stop operation is performed during program execution.) Figure 3-4 Exit Debugger Dialog Box 2) To save the current debugging environment to a project file, click the User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 29 CHAPTER 3 STARTING AND TERMINATING 3. 5 Error Messages at Start up Error messages that may be output when ID850QB starts up are listed below (by order of occurrence). When these messages are output, refer to "APPENDIX E MESSAGES". If both IECUBE and N-Wire CARD are connected, the USB connection (IECUBE) has priority. (1) When the IECUBE is connected F0100 : Can not communicate with ICE. Please confirm the installation of the device driver for the PC interface board. F0c43: Can not communicate with ICE. (N-Wire CARD) Can not communicate with ICE. Please confirm the power of ICE, connection of the interface cable. (IECUBE) F0c70: DCU cannot be accessed. F0c76 : Initial state at the time of DCU access start is unusual. F0c77 : DCU access is unusuall. Ff606: Please check connection with the target board, and power on it. Wf607 : Please check connection of the exchange adapter. Ff608 : Please disconnect the target board. A0105: Failed in reading device file (d3xxx.800). F0ca2: Device file which does not correspond to on tip debug. F0ca4 : Device file which does not correspond to IECUBE. F0c71: Reset cannot be performed. F0c72: Monitor memory cannot be accessed. F0c73: Monitor execution cannot be performed. F0c74: CPU register cannot be accessed. F0c23: Bus hold under continuation. A0c01: During access of register, CPU did time out. A0c02: During access of memory, CPU did time out. A0c03: During access of I/O register, CPU did time out. A01a0: No response from the evachip. Please confirm the signal of the CLOCK or RESET WAIT, HLDRQ and so on.(IECUBE) No response from the CPU. Please confirm the signal of the CLOCK or RESET WAIT, HLDRQ and so on.(N-Wire CARD) No response from the emulation CPU. Please confirm the signal of the CLOCK or RESET,WAIT and so on.(78K0) 30 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 3 STARTING AND TERMINATING (2) When the N-Wire CARD is connected F0100 : Can not communicate with ICE. Please confirm the installation of the device driver for the PC interface board. F0c43: Can not communicate with ICE. (N-Wire CARD) Can not communicate with ICE. Please confirm the power of ICE, connection of the interface cable. (IECUBE) F03a0: Target is not turned on. F0c70: DCU cannot be accessed. F0c76 : Initial state at the time of DCU access start is unusual. F0c77 : DCU access is unusuall. A0105: Failed in reading device file (d3xxx.800). F0ca2: Device file which does not correspond to on tip debug. F0ca3: Information that it does not support is included in on tip debug information on device file. F0c24: It cannot shift to debug mode. F0c72: Monitor memory cannot be accessed. F0c73: Monitor execution cannot be performed. F0c74: CPU register cannot be accessed. F0c23: Bus hold under continuation. A0c01: During access of register, CPU did time out. A0c02: During access of memory, CPU did time out. A0c03: During access of I/O register, CPU did time out. A01a0: No response from the evachip. Please confirm the signal of the CLOCK or RESET WAIT, HLDRQ and so on.(IECUBE) No response from the CPU. Please confirm the signal of the CLOCK or RESET WAIT, HLDRQ and so on.(N-Wire CARD) No response from the emulation CPU. Please confirm the signal of the CLOCK or RESET,WAIT and so on.(78K0) User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 31 CHAPTER 4 ASSOCIATION WITH PM plus CHAPTER 4 ASSOCIATION WITH PM plus The ID850QB can automatically perform a series of operations in development processes, such as creating source files -> compiling -> debugging -> correcting source files, in association with the PM plus. This chapter explains the following items about association with the PM plus. - Setting Build Mode - Registering Debugger to PM plus Project - To Start ID850QB from PM plus - Auto Load Caution If a load module file is created by using the Windows command prompt, the function to associate the ID850QB with the PM plus cannot be used. 4. 1 Setting Build Mode To debug the load module file created by the PM plus on the ID850QB at the source level, build to output symbol information for debugging must be performed to create a load module file. This setting can be performed by selecting [Debug Build] on the PM plus. 32 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 4 ASSOCIATION WITH PM plus 4. 2 Registering Debugger to PM plus Project The debugger to be used or the load module files to be downloaded can be specified for each project in the PM plus. 4. 2. 1 Selecting debugger The procedure for selecting the debugger is as follows: (1) Creating a new workspace 1) Select [File] menu -> [New Workspace...] on the PM plus. -> This opens the dialog box to create a new workspace using the wizard format. 2) Creating the necessary settings for the workspace with the wizard, the [New Workspace - Step 7/8 (Select File".) For details of the setting, refer to the "PM plus online help" or "User's manual". (2) Using an existing workspace 1) Select [Tool] menu -> [Debugger Settings...] on the PM plus. -> The [Debugger Settings] dialog box will be opened. The ID850QB is registered as the debugger of the active project. The ID850QB icon is displayed on the toolbar of the PM plus. 4. 2. 2 Downloading multiple load module files The load module files of the same project group are downloaded to the ID850QB. For details of the project group, refer to the "PM plus online help" or "User's manual". Download multiple load module files in the following steps. 1) Select [Tool] menu -> [Debugger Settings...] on the PM plus. -> The [Debugger Settings] dialog box will be opened. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 2) Specify ID850QB and click the Execution File".) Debugger)] dialog box will be opened. Specify ID850QB in this dialog box. (Refer to "Table 3-2 Execution 33 CHAPTER 4 ASSOCIATION WITH PM plus Figure 4-1 [Debugger Settings] Dialog Box (PM plus) -> The execution file is automatically displayed in the [File Name:]. 3) 4) 5) Specify the option in the [Option:]. (Refer to "3. 2. 2 Specification format and options".) Specify the load module file to be downloaded first in the [Debug Target File:] when the ID850QB is started. Check the [Download the debug target files in the same project group.] check box, and select the debug target files in the same group to be downloaded in the [Debug Target File List:]. ->The selected file will be downloaded right after the file specified in the [Debug Target File:] when the ID850QB is started. Note that when these files are downloaded, symbol reset and CPU reset are not executed. 6) Click the Remark 34 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 2) Specify the ID850QB in the [Debugger:]. (Refer to "Table 3-2 Execution File".) CHAPTER 4 ASSOCIATION WITH PM plus 4. 3 To Start ID850QB from PM plus The ID850QB can be started from the PM plus as follows: - Click the ID850QB starting button on the toolbar of the PM plus. - Select the [Build] menu -> [Debug] on the PM plus. - Select the [Build] menu -> [Build and Debug] on the PM plus. - Select the [Build] menu -> [Rebuild and Debug] on the PM plus. If the debugging environment of the ID850QB is saved to a project file currently being used by the PM plus, it will be started in the debugging environment saved in the project file. If the debugging environment of the ID850QB is not saved to a project file being used by the PM plus, the Configuration dialog box is opened. At this time, the device type (chip name) cannot be changed. 4. 3. 1 Restoring debugging environment The previous debugging environment can be restored by the following procedure when the ID850QB is started from the PM plus: 1) 2) Create a new workspace (project file: e.g., sample.prj) on the PM plusNote. Start the ID850QB from the PM plus. Because a new project file is created, set items other than the device type (chip name) in the Configuration dialog box in the same manner as when only the ID850QB is started. 3) 4) 5) Download the load module file to be debugged with the Download dialog box of the ID850QB. Debug the load module file on the ID850QB. Click the User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 35 CHAPTER 4 ASSOCIATION WITH PM plus 4. 4 Auto Load If a bug is found while the load module file is being debugged by the ID850QB, correct the source file using the following procedure. Compiling and re-downloading the file can be automatically executed. (Refer to "4. 4. 1 Auto load by correcting source code".) The load module is downloaded again to the ID850QB by compiling and linking the file on the PM plus with the activated ID850QB. (Refer to "4. 4. 2 Auto load by starting debugger".) Caution This processing cannot be performed if it is selected that the standard editor (idea-L) is used with the PM plus. 4. 4. 1 Auto load by correcting source code Correct the source file for auto load as follows: 1) Open the source file to be corrected in the Source window. Select [File] menu -> [Open] and specify the file to be corrected on the ID850QB (if the file is already open in the Source window, that window is displayed in the forefront). -> The specified file will be opened in the Source window. 2) Select [Edit] menu -> [Correct Source] on the ID850QB. -> An editor will be opened and the specified source file will be read. 3) 4) Correct the source file on the editor. Terminate the editor. The CPU reset is not performed when the load module file is automatically downloaded. The debug window that was opened when the editor was called, and each event setting will be restored. If the previously used line or symbol has been deleted as a result of correcting the source file, the following happens: - A variable that was displayed is dimmed. - The event mark of an event condition is displayed in yellow. - A software break point may be deleted. 5) Select [Build] menu -> [Build and Debug], or [Build] menu -> [Rebuild and Debug] on the PM plus. Caution 4. 4. 2 Auto load by starting debugger If the following operation is performed on the PM plus with the ID850QB started, the load module will be automatically downloaded to the ID850QB. - Selecting the [Build] menu -> [Build and Debug] on the PM plus. - Selecting the [Build] menu -> [Rebuild and Debug] on the PM plus. Caution The CPU reset is not performed after the load module has been downloaded. 36 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION This chapter explains about debug function of ID850QB. Table 5-1 Debug Function List (Flow of Debugging Operations) Item To set the debugging environment To download the load module To display the source file and the disassemble result To set a break point To execute the user program To check the variable value To check and edit the memory contents To check and change the register variable To check the execution time To check the trace data To manage the events RRM function To save the debug environment and window status Jump function, linking window function Refer To 5. 1 Setting debugging environment 5. 2 Download Function / Upload Function 5. 3 Source Display, Disassemble Display Function 5. 4 Break Function 5. 5 Program Execution Function 5. 6 Watch Function 5. 7 Memory Manipulation Function 5. 8 Register Manipulation Function 5. 9 Timer Function 5. 10 Trace Function (When IECUBE Connected) 5. 11 Event function 5. 12 The real-time RAM monitor function 5. 13 Load/Save Function 5. 14 Functions Common to Various Windows User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 37 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5. 1 Setting debugging environment This section explains the following items related to the setting debugging environment: - Setting operating environment - Option settings - Mapping settings - To change the value of a register required for access of an external memory 5. 1. 1 Setting operating environment The in-circuit emulator operating environment settings are performed in the Configuration dialog box that is automatically displayed when ID850QB starts up. If a project file already exists, the debugging environment can be restored by clicking the 5. 1. 2 Option settings The expanded options and debug options are set in the Extended Option dialog box, the Debugger Option dialog box . 5. 1. 3 Mapping settings The mapping settings are performed in the Configuration dialog box. The following types of mapping attributes are available: Table 5-2 Details of Mapping Attributes Attribute Target User area mapping The memory area specified for user area mapping becomes the area to accesses the memory in the target system or memory incorporated in the CPU. A memory area specified as the internal ROM is equivalent to the internal ROM of the target device (core). If the target device attempts writing to this memory area, a write protect break occurs. A memory area specified as the internal RAM is equivalent to the internal RAM of the target device (core). The actual memory configuration depends on the target system. An I/O Protect area can be set in the area specified for the "target". The I/O protect area is displayed in the same manner as an area that is not mapped (display symbol: ??), on the Memory window. By mapping an area with this attribute, data cannot be read or written from/to this area by the Memory window, on the area can therefore be protected from an illegal access. To read or write the value of the area mapped with this attribute, register the value in the IOR window or the Watch window. Internal ROM Internal RAM I/O Protect area 38 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Meaning CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5. 1. 4 To change the value of a register required for access of an external memory When mapping has been performed for external memory, must change the values of the registers required for accessing external memory prior to downloading, using the IOR window or the hook procedure. For how to change register values using the hook procedure, refer to "7. 8 Hook Procedure". For the registers to be changed, refer to the hardware manual of the CPU that is used. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 39 5. 2 Download Function / Upload Function ID850QB allows downloading and uploading of object files of the formats listed in the following table: Table 5-3 - Download - Upload Remark When the N-Wire CARD is connected, the internal flash memory can be written and the load module can be downloaded (refer to "5. 7. 5 Flash Memory Writing Function (When N-Wire CARD connected)"). 5. 2. 1 Download Object file download is done in the Download dialog box. Multiple load module files can be downloaded. The corresponding source text file (Source window) is displayed by downloading load module files with debug information. Loaded files can be checked in the Load Module List dialog box that is opened by selecting [File] menu -> [Load Module] .As a result, loading results when loading multiple load module files can be checked. Format Load module (ELF (.OUT)) Intel Hex format (00, 01, 02, 03 - 20bit address) Motorola Hex format S type (S0, S3, S7, S8) Extended Tektronix Hex format Binary data Note Automatic format detection 40 , Table 5-4 . Table 5-3 5 DEBUG FUNCTION Type of File That Can Be Downloaded Extension Load Module(*.out) Hex Format (*.hex)Note Binary Data (*.bin) User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 5. 2. 2 Upload Uploading of memory contents, etc., is performed in the Upload dialog box. The saving range can be set. Format Intel Hex format (00, 01, 02, 03 - 20bit-address) Motorola Hex format S type (S0, S3, S7 - 32bit-address) Extended Tektronix Hex format Binary data Note Remark Specify saving format. In the Intel hex format, the format is always extended (20 bits). Table 5-4 5 DEBUG FUNCTION Type of File That Can Be Uploaded Extension Hex Format (*.hex)Note Binary Data (*.bin) User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 41 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5. 3 Source Display, Disassemble Display Function Disassemble display and online assemble are per- Source file display is performed in the Source window. formed in the Assemble window. - Source display - Disassemble display - Mixed display mode (Source window) - Convert symbol (Symbol to Address) 5. 3. 1 Source display The corresponding text file is displayed in the Source window by downloading a load module file having debug information. The display start position can be changed in the Source Text move dialog box displayed by selecting [View] menu -> [Move...]. Specifications related to the tab size, display font, etc., and specification of the source path are done in the Debugger Option dialog box. Specify a searching method in the Source Search dialog box opened by clicking the File Type (Extension) Source (*.c, *.s) Text (*.txt) All (*.*) Source file (The extension can be changed in the Debugger Option dialog box.) Text file All files 5. 3. 2 Disassemble display Disassemble display is done in the Assemble window. The display start position can be changed in the Address move dialog box opened by selecting [View] menu -> [Move...]. Offset display and register name display specification are performed in the Debugger Option dialog box. Specify a serching method in the Assemble Search dialog box opened by clicking the The search result is highlighted in the Assemble window. 42 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Table 5-5 File Type Can Be Displayed Meaning CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5. 3. 3 Mixed display mode (Source window) Disassemble display of programs combined with the source file can be done by selecting [View] menu -> [Mix] in the Source window. The display contents in the mixed display mode can be saved as a view file. Normal display mode In the normal display mode, general text files can be displayed as well as source files. Mixed display mode If a program code corresponds to the line of the displayed source file, the disassembly line is displayed next to the source line. The label of the address, code data, and disassembled mnemonic are displayed (the display start position of the mnemonic is adjusted by the set value of the tab size). Caution The mixed display mode is valid only when the load module is downloaded and the symbol information is read, and the corresponding source file is displayed. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 43 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5. 3. 4 Convert symbol (Symbol to Address) In the Symbol To Address dialog box, can be displayed the address of the specified variable or function, or the value of the specified symbol. Convert symbol is performed by selecting the character string to be converted in the Source window or Assemble window,and then selecting context menu -> [Symbol...]. The Specification symbols is indicated below. Conversion Target Variable var file#var(to specify a static variable with file name) func#var(to specify a static variable with function name) file#func#var(to specify a static variable with file name and function name) func file#func (to specify a static function with file name) label file#label(to specify a local label with file name) file#no prog$file#no portname I/O regname regname pswname Function Label Line number of source file I/O port name I/O register name Register name PSW flag name Remark 1 Separator '#' '#' is used as a separator for file names, variables, function names, and line numbers. If a specified symbol is not found in the scope, all symbols (static variables, static functions, local labels) are searched. Remark 2 Separator '$' To specify a load module name when two or more load modules are read, use "$" as a separator to delimit the load module name from a file name, variable, function name, or symbol name. default status, a symbol name takes precedence. a symbol gives the priority to a register name. In the 44 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Table 5-6 Specifying Symbols Specification Method To temporarily change the priority, prefixing "$" to CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5. 4 Break Function The break function is used to stop execution of the user program by the CPU and operation of the tracer. - Break Types - Breakpoint setting - Setting break to variable - Hardware break and software break - Fail-safe break 5. 4. 1 Break Types The has the following break functions. Table 5-7 Break Types Item Hardware break Note1 (Event detection break) Software break Note1 Function to stop user program execution upon detection of the set break even condition. -> Refer to "5. 4. 2 Breakpoint setting". Function to replace the instruction at the specified address software break instruction and stop the user program executed (refer to "5. 4. 4 Hardware break and software break"). -> Refer to "5. 4. 2 Breakpoint setting". Function to stop user program execution selected by selecting [Run] menu -> [Come Here] upon detection of address specified in the Source window the Assemble window. Function to stop execution upon satisfaction of stop condition of each command ([Step In], [Next Over], [Return Out], [Slow Motion]). Function to forcibly stop execution by selecting [Run] menu > [Stop], and selecting the STOP button. It is valid for all the execution commands. Function to forcibly stop execution when the user program performs an illegal operation in relation to the memory or registers (refer to "5. 4. 5 Fail-safe break"). -> Refer to " Fail-safe Break dialog box". Function to stop user program execution when the measurement time exceeds the specified timeout time (refer to " Timer dialog box"). [Come Here] break Note2 (Simple break) Break on satisfaction of condition of step execution Forced break Fail-safe break Time out break Note1 Note2 This break is valid for [Go], [Go & GO], [Come Here], and [Restart]. After user program execution has been stopped, the breakpoint by this function is eliminated. During execution of a user program by this function, break events set before the cursor position does not occur. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Contents 45 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5. 4. 2 Breakpoint setting Breakpoints can simply be set to the desired location by clicking in the Source window or the Assemble window. Since breakpoints are set as break event conditions and managed using the Event function, restrictions apply to the number of breakpoints that can be set. tion".) (1) Breakpoint setting method Breakpoints are executed by clicking lines in which '*' is displayed (lines where program code exists). In the default setting, software breakpoint (B) is set, but if [Breakpoint] is selected in the context menu, hardware breakpoint (B, or B) is set. If a breakpoint is set on a line on which an event breakpoint has already been set, "A" indicating that multiple (Refer to "5. 11. 4 Number of enabled events for each event condi- Caution Remark A software breakpoint cannot be set in an externally mapped ROM area. Breaks set by default can also be changed in the Extended Option dialog box . Figure 5-1 Breakpoint Setting (2) Deleting a breakpoint method Click the position at which the breakpoint to be deleted is set. At the same time as setting is performed, in the default setting, software breakpoint (B) is deleted, but if [Breakpoint] is selected in the context menu, hardware breakpoint (B, or B) is deleted. another event remains, however, the mark of that event is displayed. As a result of deletion, If 46 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM events have been set is marked (refer to "Table 6-11 Event Setting Status (Event Mark)"). CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5. 4. 3 Setting break to variable Access break setting to variables can easily be done from the context menu in the Source window or the Watch window. Figure 5-2 Setting Break to Variable User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 47 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5. 4. 4 Hardware break and software break (1) Hardware break Hardware breaks are breaks that are set using one hardware resource per event condition. Therefore, in the ID850QB, they are managed using "5. 11 Event function" as break event conditions. The number of valid break points varies depending on the device (refer to "5. 11. 4 Number of enabled events for each event condition"). (2) Software break Software breaks are breaks that are set by rewriting instructions of specified addresses to software break instructions. Therefore, the number of software breaks that can be set is not limited, but settings to external ROM, stopping at variable access timing, etc., cannot be specified. Table 5-8 The Number of Valid Software Break Connected IE IECUBE N-Wire CARD 2000 2000 Note: Software breaks in relation to internal ROM and internal flash memory are automatically set by the ROM collection function. The maximum number of software breaks that can be set with the ROM collection function depends on the product (0, 4, or 8). Moreover, the software breaks set with the ROM collection function are temporarily disabled by target reset or internal reset, but they are enabled when a break occurs. Software break is managed by the Software Break Manager. Figure 5-3 Management of Software Breaks 48 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Valid Number CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5. 4. 5 Fail-safe break The fail-safe break settings are performed in the Fail-safe Break dialog box. Individual settings are possible by selecting check boxes. However, the protect setting for the internal RAM area is performed through verify processing by software, and therefore a warning is displayed during breaks. During IOR Illegal and internal RAM verify checks, the address is displayed on the status bar. Figure 5-4 Fail-safe Break Setting User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 49 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5. 5 Program Execution Function The program execution function is used to start execution of the user program by the CPU and operation of the tracer. Through user program execution, the PC advances until the set breakpoint or forced break. Break Function".) While the user program is being executed, trace event condition and timer event condition can be set. (Refer to " Trace dialog box"," Timer dialog box".) The following types of ID850QB execution functions are provided. buttons on the toolbar , or from the [Run] menu. Figure 5-5 Execution Button They are operated using the execution (Refer to "5. 4 Items [Restart] The CPU is reset and the user program is executed starting from address 0. This is the same operation as "resetting the CPU before execution of the user program and executing [Go]". The user program is executed starting from the address indicated by the current PC register and is stopped if a set break event condition is satisfied. The user program is executed starting from the address indicated by the current PC register Execution of the user program continues, ignoring set breakpoints. The user program is executed until execution returns to the calling function described in C language. [Go] [Ignore break points and Go] [Return Out] 50 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Table 5-9 Type of Execution Contents Figure 5-6 [Run] Menu CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION Items [Step In] In the Source window,Step execution of one line of the source text is performed starting from the current PC register value and the contents of each window are updated. In the Assemble window,One instruction is executed from the current PC register value and the contents of each window are updated. jarl instruction Next step execution is performed, assuming the function or subroutine called by the jarl instruction as one step (step execution continues until the nesting level becomes the same as when the jarl instruction was executed). Instruction other than jarl The same processing as [Step In] is performed. This command executes the user program starting from the specified address. Execution of the user program is stopped when a set break event condition is satisfied. The user program is executed from the address indicated by the current PC register to the address selected in the line/address display area of the Source window or the Assemble window, and then a break occurs. While the user program is being executed, the break event currently set does not occur. The user program is executed starting from the address indicated by the current PC register and stopped if a set break event condition is satisfied. The contents of each window are updated, and execution of the user program is resumed from the address at which the program was stopped. This operation is repeated until the user executes [Stop]. Step execution of one line is performed from the address indicated by the current PC register value in the source mode. In the instruction mode, step execution of one instruction is performed. The contents of each window are updated each time step execution is performed. This operation is repeated until the user executes [Stop]. [Next Over] [Start From Here] [Come Here] [Go & Go] [Slowmotion] User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Table 5-9 Type of Execution Contents 51 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5. 6 Watch Function This section explains the following items about watch function. - Displaying and changing data value - Displaying and changing local variable values - Registering and deleting watch data - Changing watch data - Temporarily displaying and changing data values - Toolbar watch function - Stack trace display function 5. 6. 1 Displaying and changing data value Shifts in data values can be checked by Displaying and changing data values is done in the Watch window. registering watch data. Specification of the display format is done in the Debugger Option dialog box. Figure 5-7 Watch Window 52 Figure 5-8 Specification of the Display Format (Debugger Option dialog box) User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5. 6. 2 Displaying and changing local variable values Displaying and changing local variable values is done in the Local Variable window. Local variables within the current function are automatically displayed in this window. (Variable addition/deletion is not possible.) Figure 5-9 Local Variable Window 5. 6. 3 Registering and deleting watch data Data registration to the Watch window can be done from the Source window or the Assemble window. This is simply done by selecting the variable or symbol name in the respective window, and then clicking the elements of an array, and members of structures and unions, cannot be deleted. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 53 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5. 6. 4 Changing watch data Changing watch data is done in the Change Watch dialog box. Changing a symbol name is permitted even when any existing data of symbols of the same name has already existed. Figure 5-10 Change Watch Dialog Box 5. 6. 5 Temporarily displaying and changing data values Temporarily displaying and changing data values is done in the Quick Watch dialog box. Select the desired variable or symbol name in the Source window or the Assemble window and lick the 5. 6. 6 Toolbar watch function The corresponding variable value pops up when the mouse cursor is placed over a selected variable in the Source window or the Assemble window. 54 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5. 6. 7 Stack trace display function This function displays stack contents of the current user program in the Stack Trace window. Figure 5-12 Stack Trace Window User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 55 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5. 7 Memory Manipulation Function This section explains the following items related to the memory manipulation: Verify check specification, etc., is done in the Extended Option dialog box. - Displaying and changing memory contents - Filling, copying, and comparing memory contents - Modifying memory contents (DMM function) - Access monitor function (when IECUBE connected) - Flash Memory Writing Function (When N-Wire CARD connected) 5. 7. 1 Displaying and changing memory contents In the Memory window, the memory contents can be displayed or changed by using mnemonic codes, hexadecimal codes, and ASCII codes. Search is done in the Memory Search dialog box displayed by clicking the 5. 7. 2 Filling, copying, and comparing memory contents Filling, copying, and comparing memory contents is done in the Memory Fill dialog box, the Memory Copy dialog box, and the Memory Compare dialog box displayed by selecting [Edit] menu -> [Memory] -> [Fill.../Copy.../ Compare.... ]. The comparison results are displayed in the Memory Compare Result dialog box. 56 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5. 7. 3 Modifying memory contents (DMM function) Memory contents can be modified during user program execution in the DMM dialog box displayed by clicking the User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 57 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5. 7. 4 Access monitor function (when IECUBE connected) The access monitor function displays the access status (read, write, read & write) for the sampling range of the The real-time RAM monitor function using different colors in the Memory window. The access monitor color-marking function is executed only during byte display. Colors are not displayed in the ASCII display area. Cumulative display setting and access status display can be cleared by selecting [View] menu -> [Access Monitoring]. Caution1 The value of memory rewritten via DMA during program execution, and the value of memory rewritten from the debugger cannot be displayed on the access monitor. Caution2 This function is enabled only when [Option] menu -> [RRM Function] is selected. Figure 5-15 Access Monitor function (Memory Window) 5. 7. 5 Flash Memory Writing Function (When N-Wire CARD connected) With the ID850QB, the internal flash memory can be written and the load module can be downloaded by the same access method as an ordinary memory operation. The data on the internal flash memory can be changed from the Memory window, Assemble window, Watch window, Memory Fill dialog box, and Memory Copy dialog box, without having to be aware that the data is that of the internal flash memory. The load module can also be downloaded to the internal flash memory by using the flash self-programming function. Caution Remark No data can be written to the internal flash memory during user program execution. With the ID850QB, the remaining area contents after the load module was downloaded to the internal flash memory are erased. 58 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5. 8 Register Manipulation Function This section explains the following items about register manipulation function. - Displaying and changing register contents - Displaying and changing peripheral I/O registers contents - Displaying and changing I/O port contents 5. 8. 1 Displaying and changing register contents Register contents can be displayed and changed in the Register window. Register name display switching (absolute name/function name) can be done in the Debugger Option dialog box. Display register selection is done in the Register Select dialog box. Figure 5-16 Absolute Name/Function Name Switching 5. 8. 2 Displaying and changing peripheral I/O registers contents peripheral I/O registers contents can be displayed and changed in the IOR window. The display start position can be changed in the Address move dialog box displayed by selecting [View] menu -> [Move...]. Display register selection is done in the IOR Select dialog box. Figure 5-17 Displaying peripheral I/O registers Contents User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 59 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5. 8. 3 Displaying and changing I/O port contents User-defined I/O ports can be displayed and changed in the IOR window once they have been registered in the Add I/O Port dialog box. In the case of products that support programmable I/O registers, programmable I/O register contents can be displayed and changed by setting programmable I/O area use in the Configuration dialog box. Figure 5-18 Register I/O Port 60 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5. 9 Timer Function The timer function measures the execution time (run-break time) from the start of user program execution until a break, or the execution time in a specific user program interval using timer events. The ID850QB timer function performs measurements using an external clock. Therefore, the measurable time Time (Timer Count (Timer))") (when IECUBE connected). - Timer event conditions - Run-Break event Remark1 Timer event condition setting/enable/disable/delete operations are possible even during user program execution. Remark2 When the N-Wire CARD is connected, there is no timer event setting function and only Run-Break time measurement is possible. The Run-Break measurement result is displayed in the status bar of the Main window. 5. 9. 1 Timer event conditions A timer event condition specifies the trigger by which time measurement is started or stopped. Timer event conditions are set in the Timer dialog box. (Refer to "5. 11 Event function".) In the ID850QB, timeout break settings can be performed in the Time Out Break area. Figure 5-19 Sets and DisplaysTimer Event (Timer Dialog Box) Continuous display in the Timer Result dialog box can be selected by clicking the User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM differs based on the setting in "Table 6-10 Relationship Between Division Ratio and Maximum Measurement 61 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5. 9. 2 Run-Break event Run-Break event is a timer event name given to a timer event condition that measures the execution time from execution to break. Run-break events are registered in advance and the run-break time can be displayed through specification in the Timer dialog box. The Run-Break time is also displayed in the status bar in the Main window. Since Run-Break events are included in the number of timer events that can be simultaneously enabled (refer to "5. 11. 4 Number of enabled events for each event condition"), they can be used added to the number of valid timer event conditions. 62 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5. 10 Trace Function (When IECUBE Connected) The trace function of the ID850QB traces the branch instructions of the user program and saves the execution flow to the trace memory. The Trace function is enabled by selecting [Option] menu -> [Trace Function]. In the ID850QB, the DMA (Direct Memory Access) start point and end point are traced regardless of the trace condition (realized/not realized, and within-range/out-of-range) (DMA point trace function priority). - Trace memory - Setting trace data - Checking trace data - Mixed display mode (Trace window) - Tracer Operation - Setting conditional trace Caution This function is used on a mutually exclusive basis with the RRM function (refer to "5. 12 The realtime RAM monitor function"). The RRM function cannot be used when [Option] menu -> [Trace Function] is selected. When [RRM Function] is selected, the trace data displayed in the Trace window consists only of the branch information and the RRM area range access information. Remark1 Trace event condition setting/enable/disable/delete operations are possible even during user program execution. In this case, the tracer operation is momentarily stopped during manipulation. 5. 10. 1 Trace memory ID850QB has trace memory with a ring structure. Size specification is done in the Extended Option dialog box. The maximum trace memory capacity is as follows. Table 5-10 Trace memory size Connected IE IECUBE 256 KB User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Maximum value 63 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5. 10. 2 Setting trace data The detailed settings for the collected traced data are done in the Extended Option dialog box. Complement display of instructions between branch instructions that cannot be traced by hardware is possible in the complement mode (enabled by selecting the Complement Data area checkbox). When the complement mode is enabled, assemble display of the internal ROM area is possible during user program execution (while the tracer is stopped). Figure 5-20 Trace Data Settings (The Extended Option Dialog Dox) 5. 10. 3 Checking trace data The trace data saved to the trace memory can be checked in the Trace window. Trace data can be searched in the Trace Search dialog box displayed by clicking the 64 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5. 10. 4 Mixed display mode (Trace window) Source file display combined with trace results can be done by selecting [View] menu -> [Mix] in the Trace window (mixed display mode). If a program code corresponds on the program fetch address to be displayed, a source file line is displayed before the line indicating the result of tracing that program fetch address. The source file line is displayed, emphasized in green. Caution The mixed display mode is valid only when the load module has been downloaded and symbol information is read, and when a fetch address, fetch data, fetch status, or result of disassembly is displayed. 5. 10. 5 Tracer Operation The trace operation differs as follows according to the user program execution format and the tracer control mode. Tracer manipulations during program execution are performed by selecting [Run] menu -> [Tracer Start/Tracer Stop]. (1) Operation during execution The tracer operation differs as follows according to [Run] menu -> [Cond. Trace ON/Cond. Trace ON] selection. Table 5-11 Type of Trace Modes Item Unconditional trace Conditional trace Trace is started when execution of user program, and ends when a break occurs. At this time, the set trace event conditions are ignored. Trace is started or stopped by the condition set in the Trace dialog box (refer to "5. 10. 6 Setting conditional trace"). If a break occurs while a trace is being executed, however, trace is stopped immediately. (2) Operation during Step In execution The tracer operates every step execution, and trace data of one step is successively added to the trace memory. (3) Operation during Next Over execution The operation of the tracer differs depending on the instruction to which Next Over is to be executed. (a) jarl disp22, [lp] instruction User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Contents 65 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION The jarl instruction and the subroutine that was called are traced. (b) Other instructions The same operation as that during Step In execution is performed. (4) Tracer control mode There are the following types of trace control mode. These trace mode settings are performed from the [Run] menu. Table 5-12 Types of Tracer Control Mode Mode Non Stop Full Stop Full Break Delay Trigger Stop Goes around the trace memory and overwrites data from the oldest frame (default). Goes around the trace memory and then stops the tracer. Goes around the trace memory and then stops the tracer and program execution Traces data by the number of delay count frames and stops the tracer when a delay trigger event has occurred. 5. 10. 6 Setting conditional trace A trace event condition triggers starting/stopping trace execution when a conditional trace is set. By setting a trace event condition in the Trace dialog box, the conditional trace can be set (refer to "5. 11 Event function"). There are the following types of conditional trace. Table 5-13 Types of Conditional Trace Item Section trace Executes a trace between two specified conditions (in a specific zone). A section trace can be executed by setting a trace start event and trace end event in the Trace dialog box and selecting [Run] menu -> [Cond. Trace ON]. Executes a trace only when a condition is satisfied. If two or more events are set as qualify trace events, a qualify trace can be executed by executing a conditional trace. A qualify trace can be executed by setting a qualify trace event in the Trace dialog box and selecting [Run] menu -> [Cond. Trace ON]. Executes a trace by the number of delay counts after a condition has been satisfied. A delay trigger trace can be executed by setting a delay trigger event in the Trace dialog box, setting a delay count in the Delay Count dialog box and selecting [Run] menu -> [Cond. Trace ON]. In this case, select [Delay Trigger Stop] . Qualify trace Delay trigger trace 66 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Contents Contents, Setting method CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5. 11 Event function Events specify specific states of the target system during debugging ,such as "fetched address 0x1000" or "Wrote data to address 0x2000". In ID850QB, such events are used as action triggers for each debugging function, such as break and trace. - Using event function - Creating events - Setting event conditions - Number of enabled events for each event condition - Managing events 5. 11. 1 Using event function Events (event conditions and event rink conditions) consist of the event conditions listed in the following table, by assigning various debugging functions. As a result, event conditions can be utilized according to the debugging purpose. Event Condition Break event Mark B Condition in which the execution of the user program or operation of a tracer is stopped. (refer to "5. 4 Break Function"). -> Break dialog box Condition in which the process of user program execution is saved to the trace memory (refer to "5. 10 Trace Function (When IECUBE Connected)"). -> Trace dialog box Condition for specifying the time measurement start timing and stop timing (refer to "5. 9 Timer Function"). -> Timer dialog box Trace event T Timer event Ti User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Table 5-14 Various Event Conditions Contents ->Setting Dialog Box 67 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5. 11. 2 Creating events Events can be used as action triggers of various event conditions described before through registration of event conditions and event link conditions, individually naming states called events. (1) Creating and registering events The creation of event conditions is done in the Event dialog box. Set an address condition, status condition, and data condition in this dialog box. Specify a combination of these as one event condition and name and register this event condition. A simple method consists in using event conditions generated by setting breakpoint in the, Source window and the Assemble window. (Refer to "5. 4. 2 Breakpoint setting".) (2) Creating and registering event links Event link conditions are conditions for single events that provide ordered restrictions for event conditions, and are generated when user programs are executed according to the specified sequence. To create an event link condition, use the Event Link dialog box. 5. 11. 3 Setting event conditions are individually created in the corresponding dialog box. (1) Setting of various event conditions The setting of the various event conditions is done by selecting the event icon of the desired event condition or event link condition displayed in the event manager area (or Event Manager) in the respective setting dialog box, and dragging and dropping this icon in the condition area to be set. Figure 5-22 Setting of Various Event Conditions The shape of the mouse cursor changes to "OK" when it is dragged over a settable condition area. Regarding the created event conditions, the event icon mark becomes red and the setting is enabled by clicking the 68 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Various event conditions listed in Table 5-14 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION (2) Settings using selection mode (settings after checking contents) The Event dialog box and the Event Link dialog box are open in the selection mode by placing the focus on the condition area to be set and then clicking the User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 69 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5. 11. 4 Number of enabled events for each event condition Up to 256 conditions can be registered as event conditions or various event conditions. One event condition or link event condition can be set for multiple types of events such as break, trace, and timer. However, the number of event conditions that can be simultaneously set (enabled) is limited as follows. Therefore, if the valid number is exceeded or if the used event conditions or event link conditions exceed the maximum number that can be used simultaneously, it is necessary to disable the set various event conditions once and then register them again. (Refer to "5. 11. 5 Managing events".) Connected IE Execute IECUBE N-Wire CARD Nx85ET RCU0+TEU+TRCU Nx85E901 RCU0 RCU1 10a 10a 2e Access 6b 4c a. 2 before executions (usable only for breaks, address range not specifiable), 8 post-execution events (4 when address range is specified, because 2 events are used for range specification) b. c. d. e. f. 3 when address range is specified, because 2 events are used for range specification 2 when address range is specified, because 2 events are used for range specification Use from Phase 1 to Phase 4 Address range specification is not possible. Can be set only for Phase 1 and Phase 2 70 Table 5-15 Number of enabled events for each event condition Event Event Link 1 1d 1f Break 10+6 10+4 2e Trace 1 - Timer 7 - User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5. 11. 5 Managing events Managing events is done with the Event Manager. The Event Manager allows display, enabling/disabling, and deletion of the Various Event Conditions. Figure 5-23 Managing Events (the Event Manager) (1) Event icons Event icons consist of a mark and an event name indicating the type of event. The color of each event icon indicates the setting status of that event. Enable/disable is switched by clicking the mark part. Charac ter Color Red E.L. Mark Indicates that the event condition or event link condition which is used for various event conditions is valid. Indicates that the Various Event Conditions is valid. The various events occur when its condition is satisfied. Indicates that the event condition or event link condition which is used for various event conditions is invalid. Indicates that the Various Event Conditions is invalid. The various events do not occur even when its condition is satisfied. Indicates that the symbol specified for an event is held pending because it cannot be recognized by the program currently loaded. Indicates that the Various Event Conditions is held pending. The various events do not occur even when its condition is satisfied. B.T.Ti. Black E.L. B.T.Ti. Yellow E. L. B.T.Ti. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Table 5-16 Event icon Meaning 71 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5. 12 The real-time RAM monitor function The real-time RAM monitor function (RRM function) displays in real time the variables allocated to the sampling range, data, etc., in the Watch window or the Memory window. Access statuses (read, write, read & write) are displayed using different colors in the Memory window using this function (refer to "5. 7. 4 Access monitor function (when IECUBE connected)"). The RRM function is enabled by selecting [Option] menu -> [RRM Function]. - Sampling range setting - Sampling time setting - RAM monitor function Caution This function is used on a mutually exclusive basis with the trace function (refer to "5. 10 Trace Function (When IECUBE Connected)").The trace function cannot be used when [Option] menu -> [RRM Function] is selected. 5. 12. 1 Sampling range setting The sampling range for the RRM function is set in the RRM dialog box. Up to 8 locations can be set in 256-byte units in the 2 KB RRM area. Figure 5-24 Sampling Range Setting (RRM Dialog Box) 5. 12. 2 Sampling time setting Setting of the sampling time for the RRM function is done in the Extended Option dialog box. Values are updated at the specified time interval. Figure 5-25 Sampling Time Setting 72 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5. 12. 3 RAM monitor function The RAM monitor function realizes the RRM function through software emulation. There are no sampling range restrictions, but user program execution is temporarily paused during sampling. Therefore, the variables and data allocated to this range are displayed almost in real time. The RAM monitor function settings are performed in the Extended Option dialog box. Figure 5-26 RAM Monitor Function Setting User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 73 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5. 13 Load/Save Function As a result, recovery of these ID850QB allows saving and loading the following types of information as files. various types of information is possible. - Debugging environment (project file) - Window display information (view file) - Window setting information (setting file) Remark The simple window status can be maintained by selecting [Window] menu -> [Static]. (Refer to "5. 14. 1 Active Status and Static Status".) 5. 13. 1 Debugging environment (project file) A project file (*.prj) is a file that records the debugging environment. A project file is created when the debugging environment at a particular point in time is saved, and that debugging environment can be restored by loading this file at a subsequent time. Loading and saving project files are done in the Project File Save dialog box and the Project File Load dialog box, respectively. To load a project file at startup, press the 74 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION (2) Contents saved to project File The following contents are saved to the project file: Window Name Configuration dialog box Main window Download dialog box Extended Option dialog box Debugger Option dialog box Fail-safe Break dialog box RRM dialog box Source window Assemble window Memory window Stack Trace window IOR window Local Variable window Trace window Event Manager Console window Expansion window Event dialog box Event Link dialog box Break dialog box Trace dialog box Timer dialog box Register window Watch window Add I/O Port dialog box DMM dialog box Delay Count dialog box Software Break Manager User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Table 5-17 Contents Saved to Project File Saved Contents All items (target device, clock setting, pin mask setting, mapping information) Display position, tool bar/status bar/button display information, execution mode information, trace on/off information File information to be downloaded Set information Display information of window Display information of window, display start address Display information of window Display information of window, event information Display information of window, link event information Display information of window, break event information Display information of window, trace event information Display information of window, timer event information Display information of window Display information of window, watch registration information Added I/O port information DMM information Delay count value Display information of window, software break information 75 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5. 13. 2 Window display information (view file) A view file is a file that records window display information. View files can be loaded and saved for each window. When a view file is loaded, a reference window (Source window in static status) is displayed and the display information at the time of saving is displayed. Loading and saving of view files are done in the View File Load dialog box and the View File Save dialog box, respectively. File Type Source Text (*.svw) Assemble (*.dis) Memory (*.mem) Watch (*.wch) Register (*.rgw) I/O Register (*.ior) Local Variable (*.loc) Stack Trace (*.stk) Trace (*.tvw) Console (*.log) All (*.*) Source (*.c, *.s) (During downloading) Text (*.txt) Source window View file of the Source window Assemble window View file of the Disassemble window Memory window View file of the Memory window Watch window View file of the Watch window Register window View file of the Register window IOR window View file of the IOR window Local Variable window View file of the Local Variable window Stack Trace window View file of the Stack Trace window Trace window View file of the Trace window Console window View file of the Console window All files Source fileNote Text file Note The extension of the source file can be changed in the Extended Option dialog box. 76 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Table 5-18 Type of the View Files Target Window File Name CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5. 13. 3 Window setting information (setting file) A setting file is a file that records the window setting information (watch data settings, peripheral I/O registers settings, and event settings). Setting files can be loaded and saved for each window. When a setting file is loaded, the target window is displayed and the setting information that was saved is restored. Loading and saving of setting files are done in the Environment Setting File Load dialog box and the Environment Setting File Save dialog box, respectively. File Type Watch (*.wch)Note I/O Register (*.ior)Note Event (*.evn) Watch window Setting file of the Watch window IOR window Setting file of the IOR window Event Manager Setting file of event Note A variable value can be loaded. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Table 5-19 Type of the Setting Files Target Window File Name 77 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5. 14 Functions Common to Various Windows The target windows have the following common functions. - Active Status and Static Status - Jump function - Trace Result with Linking Window (when IECUBE connected) - Drag & drop function 5. 14. 1 Active Status and Static Status The Source window that is displaying the source file to which symbol information is read, Assemble window and Memory window has two statuses: Only one window can be opened in the active status. However, because two or more windows in the static status can be opened, the current status of the windows can be temporarily held. Select this status by the [Window] menu. (1) Active status The display position and contents of the window in the active status are automatically updated in association with the current PC value. This window is also the jump destination of the jump function. If this window is linked with the Trace window, the contents displayed in the active window are updated in association with the Trace window. Only one window can be opened in the active status. (2) Static status The display position of the window in the static status does not move in association with the current PC value, but the displayed contents are updated. The static window is not used as the jump destination of the jump function. In addition, it is not linked with the Trace window. If an active window is already open, the next window is opened in the static status. Two or more static windows can be opened at the same time. 78 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5. 14. 2 Jump function The jump function is used to jump to Source window, Assemble window or Memory window from a jump pointer that is the line or address on which the cursor is placed, and display the contents of the jump destination window from the jump pointer. You can jump among the above windows, or from Trace window, Stack Trace window, Event Manager and Register window to the above windows. (1) Jump method The jump method is as follows: 1) Move the cursor to the line or address that is to be used as the jump pointer, on the window from which jumping is possible (select an event icon on the Event Manager). 2) Select the following menu item to which execution is to jump from the [Jump] menu. Source window -> Select [Source Text] Assemble window -> Select [Assemble] Memory window -> Select [Memory] Caution If a program code does not exist on the line at the cursor position, the first address of the line with a program code above or below that line is used as the jump pointer. (2) Details of jump source address The details of jump source address is as follows: Table 5-20 Details of Jump Source Address Target Window From the Register window From the Memory window From the Event Manager Registers selected Address at the cursor position If the selected event icon is that of an event condition, an address condition is used as the jump pointer. If the address condition is set in point If the address condition is set in range If the address condition is set in bit Jump to specified address Jump to lower address (point address before the mask if a mask is specified) Jump to address at the bit position User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Details of Jump Pointer 79 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION Table 5-20 Details of Jump Source Address Target Window From the Stack Trace window A function at the cursor position that stack flame number indicates is used as the jump pointer. With current function If the jump destination is the Source window Other than above Jumps to the current PC line Jumps to the current PC address With function other than current function If the jump destination is the Source window Other than above From the Trace window Jump to the Memory window If the cursor position is at an access address, access data, or access status Other than above Jump to the Source window or Assemble window 5. 14. 3 Fetch address Access address Jump to the line that calls a nested function. Jump to the address next to the instruction that calls a nested function. Trace Result with Linking Window (when IECUBE connected) By linking Trace window with each window (Source window, Assemble window or Memory window), the corresponding part can be displayed on the linked window, by using the address at the cursor position on the Trace window as a pointer. If the cursor is moved on the Trace window, the corresponding part on the linked window is highlighted or indicated by the cursor position. 80 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Details of Jump Pointer Fetch address CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION (1) Linking method 1) 2) Set the Trace window as the current window. Select [View] menu -> [Window Synchronize] to select a window to be linked. Source window -> Select [Source Text] Assemble window -> Select [Assemble] Memory window ->Select [Memory] 3) 4) Move the cursor to the line to be linked in the trace result display area of the Trace window. Using the address of the line selected in 3 as a pointer, the corresponding part is highlighted (or indicated by the cursor position) in the display area of the window selected in 2. Caution The linking source address differs as follows depending on the cursor position in the trace result display area if the Memory window is linked. Access address, access data, access status -> Access address Others -> Fetch address When the Source window or Assemble window is linked, the fetch address is always used as the pointer. 5. 14. 4 Drag & drop function Line numbers, addresses, and text highlighted by selecting them can be dragged and dropped in another window using the following method. 1) Drag the selected line number, address, or text. -> The shape of the mouse cursor changes from an arrow to "-". 2) Drop the selection in a window or area where it can be dropped. -> The shape of the cursor changes from "-" to "OK" when the cursor is placed over a window or area where the selection can be dropped. In the window in which the line number of the address has been dropped, an operation is performed on the dropped address or the address that is obtained from the dropped line number. For example, a variable can be simply registered by dragging and dropping in the Watch window such a variable located in the Source window. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 81 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION (1) Drag & drop details The operation to be performed after dropping the line number or address differs, depending on the window or area in which the line number or address has been dropped. Table 5-21 Details of Drag & Drop Function (Line/Address) Window/Area to Drop to The Event Manager or the event manager area in each various event setting dialog box Automatically creates an execution event condition by using the dropped line number or address as an address condition. Event condition names are automatically created as Evt00001, Evt00002, and so on. An external sense data condition and path count are not specified. The address condition is set for the closest symbol in the format of symbol name + offset value. Automatically creates an execution event condition by using the dropped line number or address as an address condition. The automatically created event condition is set in each condition setting area in which the line number or address has been dropped. Event condition names are automatically created as Evt00001, Evt00002, and so on. An external sense data condition and path count are not specified. The address condition is set for the closest symbol in the format of symbol name + offset value. The text of the dropped line number or address is set in the area in which the line number or address has been dropped. The address condition is set for the closest symbol in the format of symbol name + offset value. Condition setting area in each various event setting dialog box (other than address and data setting areas) Condition setting area in each various event setting dialog box (address and data setting areas) Window/Area to Drop to The Event Manager or the event manager area in each various event setting dialog box If the dropped text can be converted as a symbol into an address value, an event condition in the Access status (all access statuses) or Execute status is automatically created, using the converted address value as an address condition. Event condition names are automatically created as Evt00001, Evt00002, and so on. A data condition, an external sense data condition and path count are not specified. The address condition is set by the dropped text. The relationship between the event condition to be created and the symbol is as follows: Symbols Variable Function Symbol in data section Symbol in code section Others Status Access(R/W) Execute Access(R/W) Execute Access (R/W) 82 Table 5-22 Operation After Drop Details of Drag & Drop Function (Character String) Operation After Drop User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION Window/Area to Drop to Condition setting area in each various event setting dialog box (other than address and data setting areas) If the dropped text can be converted as a symbol into an address value, an event condition in the Access status (all access statuses) or Execute status is automatically created, using the converted address value as an address condition. The automatically created event condition is set in each condition setting area in which the line number or address has been dropped. Event condition names are automatically created as Evt00001, Evt00002, and so on. A data condition, an external sense data condition and path count are not specified. The address condition is set by the dropped text. The relationship between the event condition to be created and the symbol is as follows: Symbols Variable Function Symbol in data section Symbol in code section Others Status Access(R/W) Execute Access (R/W) Execute Access (R/W) Condition setting area in each various event setting dialog box (address and data setting areas) Watch window The dropped text is set in the area. If the dropped text is recognizable as a symbol, the contents of the symbol are displayed. Caution The various event setting dialog boxes include the Event dialog box, Event Link dialog box, Break dialog box, Trace dialog box and Timer dialog box. Table 5-22 Details of Drag & Drop Function (Character String) Operation After Drop User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 83 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE This chapter explains in detail the functions of the windows and dialog boxes of ID850QB. - Window List - Explanation of Windows 6. 1 Window List lists the windows of the ID850QB. Window Name Main window This window is displayed first, when the ID850QB is started. It controls execution of the user program. Various windows are opened from this window. Displays and sets the ID850QB operation environment. Displays and sets the extended options of the ID850QB. Sets the fail-safe breaks (IECUBE) Sets the RRM sampling range Displays and sets other options. Saves the current debug environment to project file Loads the debug environment. Loads an object file and binary file. Saves the memory contents to a file. Lists the names of the downloaded load module files. Displays a source file and text file Searches in the Source window Specifies a file to be displayed in the Source window and the position from which displaying the file is to be started. Disassembles the program and executes online assembly. Searches in the Assemble window Specifies the start address to display the contents of the Memory window or Assemble window. Displays the address of the specified variable or function, or the value of the specified symbol Displays and changes specified watch data Displays temporarily specified watch data Configuration dialog box Extended Option dialog box Fail-safe Break dialog box RRM dialog box Debugger Option dialog box Project File Save dialog box Project File Load dialog box Download dialog box Upload dialog box Load Module List dialog box Source window Source Search dialog box Source Text move dialog box Assemble window Assemble Search dialog box Address move dialog box Symbol To Address dialog box Watch window Quick Watch dialog box 84 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM The Table 6-1 Table 6-1 Window List Contents CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Window Name Add Watch dialog box Change Watch dialog box Local Variable window Stack Trace window Memory window Memory Search dialog box Memory Fill dialog box Memory Copy dialog box Memory Compare dialog box Memory Compare Result dialog box DMM dialog box Register window Register Select dialog box IOR window IOR Select dialog box Add I/O Port dialog box Timer dialog box Timer Result dialog box Trace window Trace Search dialog box Trace Data Select dialog box Trace move dialog box Trace dialog box Delay Count dialog box Event Manager Software Break Manager Event dialog box Event Link dialog box Break dialog box Registers watch data todisplay in the Watch window Changes watch data todisplay in the Watch window Displays and changes the local variable in the current function. Displays the current stack contents Display the contents of memory. Searches in the Memory window Fills the memory contents with specified data. Copies the memory. Compares the memory. Displays the result of comparing the memory. Sets addresses and data subject to DMM. Displays the contents of registers. Selects registers to be displayed in the Register window. Displays the contents of peripheral I/O registers Selects peripheral I/O registers and I/O ports to be displayed in the IOR window Registers an I/O port to be displayed in the IOR window. Registers and sets timer event conditions, and displays execution time measurement result, and . (IECUBE) Displays execution time measurement results. (IECUBE) Displays trace results. (IECUBE) Searches trace data. (IECUBE) Selects items to be displayed in the Trace window. (IECUBE) Specifies the start address to display the contents of the Trace window. (IECUBE) Registers and sets trace event conditions. (IECUBE) Sets the delay count of a delay trigger trace event.(IECUBE) Displays, enables/disables, and deletes each event condition. Display, enable or disable, and delete software breaks. Registers event conditions. Registers event link conditions. Registers and sets break event conditions. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Table 6-1 Window List Contents 85 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Window Name View File Save dialog box View File Load dialog box Environment Setting File Save dialog box Environment Setting File Load dialog box Reset Debugger dialog box Exit Debugger dialog box About dialog box Console window Font dialog box Browse dialog box Saves the display information of the current window to a view file. Loads the view file of each window. Saves the setting information of the current window to a setting file. Loads the setting file of each window. Initializes the ID850QB,CPU, and symbol information. Terminate the ID850QB. Displays the version of the ID850QB. Inputs commands. Displays the types of fonts displayed. Selects the file to be set 86 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Table 6-1 Window List Contents CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 6. 2 Explanation of Windows This section explains each window or dialog box as follows: Window Name / Dialog box Name Briefly explains the function of the window or dialog box and points to be noted. If an invalid window/dialog box exists due to a connected IE, the name of the valid connected IE is indicated at the lower right of the window/dialog box name. In addition, the display image of the window or dialog box is also illustrated. Items of related operation are also explained. Opening Explains how to open the window or dialog box. Explanation of each area Explains items to be set to or displayed in each area of the window or dialog box. Context menu Explains the context menu that is displayed in the window when the right mouse button is clicked. From the context menu, convenient functions often used in this window can be selected with a single action (window only). Function buttons Explains the operation of each button in the window or dialog box. Related operations Explains the operation of a window or dialog box related to this window or dialog box. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 87 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Main window This window is automatically opened when the ID850QB is started up and initialized. Execution of the user program is controlled in this window. Execution of the user program is controlled in the following three modes: - Source mode (Debugs the user program at the source level.) - Instruction mode (Debugs the user program at the instruction level.) - Auto mode (Automatically selects the source mode or instruction mode.) Figure 6-1 Main Window - Menu bar - Toolbar - Window display area - Status bar Menu bar (1) [File] menu (2) [Edit] menu (3) [View] menu (4) [Option] menu (5) [Run]menu (6) [Event] menu (7) [Browse] menu (8) [Jump] menu 88 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM In ID850QB, other windows are manipulated from this window (refer to "Table 6-1 Window List"). CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (9) [Window] menu (10) [Help] menu (1) [File] menu Open... Loads a view file, source file, or text file. Opens the View File Load dialog box. The operation differs depending on the extension of the file selected in the dialog box. Saves the contents displayed on the current window to the file whose name is specified. Opens the View File Save dialog box. Closes the current window. Downloads a file. Opens the Download dialog box. Lists the names of the files that have been downloaded. Opens the Load Module List dialog box. Uploads a program. Opens the Upload dialog box. Manipulates a project file. Opens a project file. Opens the Project File Load dialog box. Overwrites the current status to the project file currently being read to the ID850QB. Saves the current status to a specified project file. Opens the Project File Save dialog box. Manipulates a setting file. Opens a setting file. Opens the Environment Setting File Load dialog box. Saves the setting in the current window to the setting file. Opens the Environment Setting File Save dialog box. Initializes the CPU, symbols, and ID850QB. Opens the Reset Debugger dialog box. Terminate the ID850QB. Opens the Exit Debugger dialog box. Lists the names of the files opened. Save As... Close Download... Load Module... Upload... Project Open... Save Save As... Environment Open... Save As... Debugger Reset... Exit (Open file) (2) [Edit] menu Cut Copy Paste Write in Restore Memory Cuts a selected character string and saves it to the clipboard buffer. Copies a selected character string and saves it to the clipboard buffer. Pastes the contents of the clipboard buffer to the text cursor position. Writes the modified contents to the target. Cancels the modification. Manipulates the memory contents. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 89 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Fill... Copy... Compare... Modify... Edit Source Fills the memory contents with specified codes. Opens the Memory Fill dialog box. Copies the memory. Opens the Memory Copy dialog box. Compares the memory. Opens the Memory Compare dialog box. Rewrites the memory contents during user program execution. Opens the DMM dialog box. Opens the source file displayed in the active Source window with the editor specified by the PM plus when the PM plus runs. (3) [View] menu The [View] menu contains common parts as well as dedicated parts added according to the active window. For details about the dedicated parts, refer to the description of each window. (a) Common items Search... Performs a search. Opens the search dialog box corresponding to the current window. Same operation as the Move... Quick Watch... Add Watch... View Watch Change Watch... Delete Watch Symbol... (4) [Option] menu Tool Bar Status Bar Button Source Mode Instruction Mode Selects whether the tool bar is displayed (default) or not. Selects whether the status bar is displayed (default) or not. Selects whether the buttons on each window are displayed (default) or not. Executes step execution at the source level (in line units). Executes step execution at the instruction level (in instruction units). 90 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Auto Mode Automatically selects step execution at the source level or step execution at the instruction level (default). Step execution is performed at the source level (in a mode other than mixed display mode) if Source window is active. It is performed at the instruction level if Assemble window is active. If neither window is active, step execution is performed at the source level. Sets the environment. Opens the Configuration dialog box. Sets extended options. Opens the Extended Option dialog box. Sets the sampling range for the real-time RAM monitor function (RRM function). Opens the RRM dialog box (when IECUBE connected). Sets ID850QB options. Opens the Debugger Option dialog box. Adds user-defined I/O ports. Opens the Add I/O Port dialog box. Clears the trace data. This item is displayed only when Trace window is active (when IECUBEconnected). Selects the real-time RAM monitor function (RRM function) (used on a mutually exclusive basis with the trace function) (when IECUBE connected). When the RRM function is selected, the data displayed in the Trace window consists only of the branch information and the RRM area range access information. Also, when this function is selected, the menus related to tracing become invalid. Selects the trace function (used on a mutually exclusive basis with the RRM function) (when IECUBE connected). When the trace function is selected, the RRM function cannot be used. Configuration... Extended Option... RRM Setting... Debugger Option... Add I/O Port ... Trace Clear RRM Function Trace Function (5) [Run]menu Restart Resets the CPU and executes the program. Same operation as the ReGo button Stop Forcibly stops program execution. Same operation as the Stop button Go Executes the program from the current PC. Same operation as the Go button Ignore break points and Go Ignores break points being set, and executes the program. Same operation as the GoN button Return Out The user program is executed until execution returns. Note: This command is used for a function described in C language. Same operation as the Ret button Step In Executes the instructions in the program one by one (step execution). If a function or subroutine is called, its instructions are executed one by one. Same operation as the Step button User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 91 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Next Over Executes the instructions in the program one by one (Next step execution). If a function or subroutine is called, its instructions are not executed on a stepby-step basis. Same operation as the Over button Start From Here Come Here Go & Go Executes the program from the cursor position on Source window or Assemble window . Executes the program from the current PC to the cursor position in the Source window or Assemble window. Continues executing the program. If a break occurs because a break condition is satisfied, the window is updated and the program is executed again. Same operation as clicking the Go each time a break has occurred. Slowmotion Continues step execution. Each time step execution has been performed, the window is updated and then step execution is performed again. Same operation as clicking the Step each time a break has occurred. CPU Reset Resets the CPU. Same operation as the Res button Change PC Break Point Software Break Point Delete All Breakpoints Uncond. Trace ON Sets the address at the cursor position in the Source window or Assemble window to the PC. Sets or deletes a breakpoint at the cursor position in the Source window or Assemble window. Sets or deletes a software breakpoint at the cursor position in the Source window or Assemble window. Deletes all the set software break events. Validates unconditional trace so that trace can always be executed during program execution (default). (When IECUBE connected). At this time, the set trace event conditions are ignored. The trace mode cannot be changed while the tracer is activated. Validates conditional trace and traces in accordance with the trace event condition during program execution (when IECUBE connected ). The trace mode cannot be changed while the tracer is activated. Sets trace control mode. (when IECUBE connected) . Goes around the trace memory and overwrites data from the oldest frame (default). Goes around the trace memory and then stops the tracer. Goes around the trace memory and then stops the tracer and program execution Traces data by the number of delay count frames and stops the tracer when a delay trigger event has occurred. Cond. Trace ON Tracer Control Mode Non Stop Full Stop Full Break Delay Trigger Stop 92 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Timer Start/Timer Stop Starts timer measurement when it is stopped, or stops it when it is in progress (when IECUBE connected). This item is invalid if the program is not being executed and if a timer event is not used. Immediately after program execution has been started, timer measurement is in progress. Starts the tracer when it is stopped, or stops it when it is in progress (when IECUBE connected) . This item is invalid if the program is not being executed. Immediately after program execution has been started , the tracer is executed. Tracer Start/Tracer Stop (6) [Event] menu Event Manager Manages various event conditions. Opens the Event Manager. Same operation as the Mgr button Software Break Manager Event... Manages software break event conditions. Opens the Software Break Manager. Registers an event condition. Opens the Event dialog box. Same operation as the Evn button Event Link... Break... Registers an event link condition. Opens the Event Link dialog box. Registers and sets a break event condition. Opens the Break dialog box. Same operation as the Brk button Trace... Registers and sets a trace event condition (when IECUBE connected) . Opens the Trace dialog box. Same operation as the Trc button Timer... Registers and sets a timer event condition (when IECUBE connected) . Opens the Timer dialog box. Same operation as the Tim button Delay Count... Sets a delay count and displays the delay value (when IECUBE connected) . Opens the Delay Count dialog box. (7) [Browse] menu Source Text Displays a source text. Opens the Source window. If there is this window already open in the active status, it is opened in the static status. Same operation as the Src button Assemble Displays the disassemble results. Opens the Assemble window. If there is this window already open in the active status, it is opened in the static status. Same operation as the Asm button Memory Displays the contents of the memory. Opens the Memory window. If there is this window already open in the active status, it is opened in the static status. Same operation as the Mem button User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 93 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Watch Displays the watch contents. Opens the Watch window. Same operation as the Wch button Register Displays the register contents. Opens the Register window. Same operation as the Reg button I/O Register Displays the contents of the Peripheral I/O registers. Opens the IOR window. Same operation as the IOR button Local Variable Displays the local variable. Opens the Local Variable window. Same operation as the Loc button Stack Trace Displays the stack trace results. Opens the Stack Trace window. Same operation as the Stk button Trace Displays the trace results (when IECUBE connected) . Opens the Trace window. Same operation as the TrW button Console Others (8) [Jump] menu Source Text Opens the Console window. Displays other windows. Displays a user-defined window list. Displays the corresponding source text and source line, using the data value selected in the current window as the jump destination address. If no line information exists at the jump destination address, however, you cannot jump. Opens the Source window. If an active Source window is open, that window is displayed in the forefront (so that it can be manipulated). Disassembles and displays the results from the jump destination address specified by the data value selected in the current window. Opens the Assemble window. If an active Assemble window is open, that window is displayed in the forefront (so that it can be manipulated). Displays the memory contents from the jump destination address specified by the data value selected in the current window. Opens the Memory window. If an active Memory window is open, that window is displayed in the forefront (so that it can be manipulated). Assemble Memory (9) [Window] menu New Window Opens a new window displaying the same contents as those of the current window.This menu is valid only when the current window is Source window, Assemble window or Memory window. Cascade display of the windows in the Main window. Tile display of the windows in the Main window. Rearranges the icons in the Main window. Cascade Tile Arrange Icons 94 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Close All Refresh Active Static (Open Window) Closes all windows, except the Main window. Updates the contents of the window with the latest data. Sets the window in the active status. Sets the window in the static status. Lists the windows that are open. The window with the check mark shown on the side of the figure is the current window. By selecting a window name, the selected window is used as the current window. (10) [Help] menu ID850QB Help Command Reference Main Window Help Current Window Help About... Displays the help of ID850QB. Opens the Help window of COMMAND REFERENCE. Displays the help of the Main window. Displays the help of the current window. Displays the version of the ID850QB. Opens the About dialog box. Toolbar (1) Meaning of each button (2) Operation of Toolbar (1) Meaning of each button The meaning of each button on the toolbar is as follows. When the mouse cursor is placed on a button of the toolbar, a tool hint pops up several seconds later. Stops execution of the user program. Same function as [Run] menu -> [Stop] . Resets the CPU and executes the user program. Same function as [Run] menu - > [Restart] . Executes the user program from the current PC without resetting the CPU. Same function as [Run] menu -> [Go] . Ignores break points being set, and executes the user program. Same function as [Run] menu -> [Ignore break points and Go] . The user program is executed until execution returns Same function as [Run] menu -> [Return Out] . Note : This command is used for a function described in C language. Step execution (executes instructions in the program one by one.) If a function or subroutine is called, its instructions are executed one by one. Same function as [Run] menu -> [Step In] . Next step execution (executes the program, assuming a function/call statement as one step.) If a function or subroutine is called, its instructions are not executed on a step-by-step basis. Same function as [Run] menu -> [Next Over] . Stop ReGo Go Go Ret Step Over User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 95 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Resets the CPU. Res Same function as [Run] menu -> [CPU Reset]. Opens the View File Load dialog box. Same function as [File] menu -> [Open...]. Open Opens the Download dialog box. Same function as [File] menu -> [Download...]. Load Opens the Project File Load dialog box. Same function as [File] menu -> [Project] -> [Open...]. Displays the source text. Opens the Source window. Same function as [Browse] menu -> [Source Text] . Displays the disassemble results. Opens the Assemble window. Same function as [Browse] menu -> [Assemble] . Displays the contents of the memory. Opens the Memory window. Same function as [Browse] menu -> [Memory] . Displays the watch contents. Opens the Watch window. Same function as [Browse] menu -> [Watch] . Displays the register contents. Opens the Register window. Same function as [Browse] menu -> [Register] . Displays the contents of the Peripheral I/O registers. Opens the IOR window. Same function as [Browse] menu -> [I/O Register] . Displays the local variable contents. Opens the Local Variable window. Same function as [Browse] menu -> [Local Variable] . Displays the current stack contents. Opens the Stack Trace window. Same function as [Browse] menu -> [Stack Trace] . Displays the trace results (when IECUBE connected) . Opens the Trace window. Same function as [Browse] menu -> [Trace] . Opens the Event Manager. Same function as [Event] menu -> [Event Manager...]. Registers and sets events. Opens the Event dialog box. Same function as [Event] menu -> [Event...]. Registers and sets break events. Opens the Break dialog box. Same function as [Event] menu -> [Break...]. Registers and sets a trace event. (when IECUBE connected) . Opens the Trace dialog box. Same function as [Event] menu -> [Trace...]. Registers and sets a timer event. (when IECUBE connected) . Opens the Timer dialog box. Same function as [Event] menu -> [Timer...]. Proj Src Asm Mem Wch Reg IOR Loc Stk TrW Mgr Evn Brk Trc Tim 96 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (2) Operation of Toolbar Whether the toolbar is displayed or not can be specified by selecting [Option] menu -> [Tool Bar]. This toolbar can be displayed in the following two modes. The modes are selected in the Debugger Option dialog box. Figure 6-2 Toolbar (Picture Only) Figure 6-3 Toolbar (Picture and Text) Window display area This area displays various debug windows. The displayed window can be changed in size or an icon can be created in this area. Status bar The status bar displays the status of the ID850QB and in-circuit emulator. While the user program is being executed, the status bar is displayed in red. Whether the status bar is displayed or not can be specified by selecting [Option] menu -> [Status Bar]. Figure 6-4 Status Bar (1) Program name Source name Line number (2) Function name (3) PC value (4) CPU status (5) IE status (6) Break Cause (7) STEP mode Displays the program file name indicated by the PC value. Displays the source file name indicated by the PC value. Displays the line number indicated by the PC value. Displays the function name indicated by the PC value. Displays the current PC value. Refer to "Table 6-3 IE status". (If there are two or more the statuses, they delimited with '|' and displayed.) Displays the step execution mode. Displays that the following modes are selected from the [Option] menu: SRC.............. Source mode INST ............. Instruction mode AUTO ........... Automatic mode User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Refer to "Table 6-4 Refer to "Table 6-2 CPU status". Break Cause". 97 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (8) Key input mode Displays the key input mode. INS ............... Insertion mode OVR.............. Overwrite mode The Memory window is fixed to OVR mode. Display HALT STOP/IDLE HOLD WAIT RESET POW OFF Halt mode Software stop mode, hardware stop mode or idle mode Bus hold mode Wait mode Reset mode Power is not supplied to the target Table 6-3 IE status Display RUN STEP TRC TIM BREAK Time User program execution in progress (the color of the status bar changes). Step execution in progress. Tracer operating (when IECUBE connected) . Timer operating (when IECUBEconnected) Break occurring. Displays the result of measuring the time from the start of user program execution to the occurrence of break (Run-Break time) (refer to "Table 6-16 Measurable Values") . Measurement result overflowed. TIMER OVERFLOW Table 6-4 Break Cause Display Manual Break Temporary Break Event Break Software Break Trace Full Break Non Map Break Forced break Temporary break Break by event Software break Break due to trace full (when IECUBE connected) Non-mapped area is accessed (when IECUBE connected) . Meaning 98 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Table 6-2 CPU status Meaning Meaning CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Table 6-4 Break Cause Display Write Protect IOR Illegal (xxx) An attempt has been made to write to a write-protected area (when IECUBE connected) . Illegal access to peripheral I/O register was performed (when IECUBE connected). xxx indicates the corresponding address. Execution time-over detected (when IECUBE connected) Flash macro service in progress (when N-Wire CARD connected) During break, performed verify check of IRAM guarded area and rewrote value (when IECUBE is connected). xxx xxx indicates the relevant address and data (in case of multiple items, only first item is displayed). Timer Over Break Flash Macro Service IRAM Write Protect (xxx xxx) User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Meaning 99 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Configuration dialog box This dialog box is used to display and set the ID850QB operation environment. (Refer to "5. 1 Setting debugging environment".) This dialog box is automatically displayed after the ID850QB is started up. However, no setting is required to read a project as the results of reading the project file are reflected in this dialog box. (Refer to "5. 13. 1 Debugging environment (project file)".) Figure 6-5 Configuration Dialog Box (When IECUBE connected) 100 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Figure 6-6 Configuration Dialog Box (When N-Wire CARD connected) - Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons Opening (Automatically when the ID850QB is started up) Select [Option] menu -> [Configuration...]. Explanation of each area (1) Chip (2) Internal ROM/RAM (3) Clock (4) Programmable I/O Area (5) ID Code (6) Peripheral Break (7) Monitor Clock (8) N-Wire cable (9) Target (10) Fail-safe Break (11) Mask (12) Memory Mapping User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 101 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (1) Chip This area is used to select the chip name. A chip name is selected from the drop-down list. On the drop-down list, only the chip names registered to the registry from the device file installer are displayed. This area can be specified only when the debugger is started up. Remark By default, the type selected at the previous startup is displayed, but if that type is not registered, the first type registered is displayed. (2) Internal ROM/RAM This area is used to set the size of the internal RAM and internal ROM of the CPU. (Refer to "5. 1. 3 Mapping settings".) A mapping size is selected from the drop-down list. The default size is obtained from the device file through selection in (1) Chip , and displayed (value with '*'). Table 6-5 Range and Unit of Internal ROM/RAM Setting Area Internal ROM Sets the Internal ROM size (When IECUBE connected) Displays the Internal ROM size (When N-Wire CARD connected) Internal RAM (3) Clock Sets the Internal RAM size Settings related to the main clock and subclock are performed here. 102 Meaning Settable range 0,8,32,64,128,256,512,1024 (KB) 4096,12288,28672,61440 bytes User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Main OSC (MHz) Specifies a frequency before the main clock is multiplied. A frequency can be selected from the drop-down list (5.000, 8.000, 13.500, or 18.000) or directory input. Specifies the main clock multiplication rate. This value can be selected from the drop-down list (1 to 10), or directly input. Specifies the subclock frequency (setting this parameter is disabled for types that do not have a subclock). A frequency can be selected from the drop-down list or directory input. Multiply rate Sub OSC (KHz) (4) Programmable I/O Area This area is used to specify usage of the programmable I/O area and the start address. The start address of the programmable I/O area can be specified, only if the device selected by (1) Chip supports the programmable I/O area. The start address of the programmable I/O area can be input by checking the check box when the programmable I/O area is used. The address is aligned to 16 KB. Caution Remark To use a programmable I/O area or extended I/O area, mapping that area as a target is required. In the case of a device with an extended I/O area with fixed addresses, the device selected by (1) Chip , Setting of this area is performed automatically. (5) ID Code This area is used to input the ID code to be used when the code on the internal ROM or internal flash memory is read by ID850QB (ID code authentication) (When N-Wire CARDconnected) This area does not have to be set with a ROMless product or a product without a security unit. Input a hexadecimal number of 20 digits (10 bytes) as the ID code (all 'F' by default). The ID code is saved to the registry. If inputting the ID code fails three times, the ID850QB is forcibly terminated. For the details of ID code authentication, refer to "N-Wire CARDUser's Manual". (6) Peripheral Break This area is used to specify whether the peripheral emulation function of in-circuit emulator is stopped during a break. Break Non Break Stopped Not stopped (default) User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 103 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (7) Monitor Clock This area is used to specify whether the operation clock of the monitor program is switched from the sub clock to the main clock during a break. This area does not have to be set with a product without a sub clock. System The operation clock is switched to the main clock and the monitor program is executed (default). Caution In theID850QB, the clock is changed by manipulating PCC, but not while the main clock is stopped. If the operation clock is switched to the main clock during a break, the clock is returned to the previous setting when execution returns to the user program. The monitor program is executed with the clock selected by the user program. User (8) N-Wire cable This area is used to select the length of the PC interface cable that connects the in-circuit emulator and host machine. (When N-Wire CARD connected) Caution If the actual PC interface cable length and the value set in this area do not match, the ID850QB will not start (for example, if [50 cm] is selected when a 2-meter cable is connected). 50cm 2m 50 cm cable connection (default) DCK = 20 MHz 2 m cable connection DCK = 10 MHz Caution When 2 m is selected, the maximum value of the execution time measurement function becomes double, and the resolution becomes half. (9) Target This area is used to select whether the target board is to be connected to the in-circuit emulator or not(when IECUBE connected). Remark It is used to detect an illegal power supply status. The default is determination by detecting the power (TVDD) of the target. 104 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Connect Not Connect (10) Fail-safe Break be connected not be connected Clicking the This area is used to mask the signal sent from the target. The signal of a masked pin is not input to the in-circuit emulator and CPU. Mask a pin only when the operation of the target system is not stable at the debugging stage. Remark If a device file supporting TM tag is used, however, select Mode00 to Mode1F (the modes to be displayed are determined by the definition of the device file). When the IECUBE is connected and when the target is connected, Target Depend can be selected. (12) Memory Mapping access size, memory attribute, and address. (a) Access Size Selects memory access size. This setting is used to specify the access size on the ID850QBsoftware; the operation of the external bus hardware is set in accordance with the settings of the MODE pin and I/O register. 8Bit 16Bit 32Bit Accesses memory with ld.b instruction/st.b instruction. Accesses memory with ld.h instruction/st.h instruction. Accesses memory with ld.w instruction/st.w instruction. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 105 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (a) Memory Attribute The following mapping attributes can be selected. Select a mapping attribute according to the usage. (Refer to "5. 1. 3 Mapping settings".) mapping attribute Target I/O ProtectNote1 Selects the target memory. Selects the I/O protect area. (This area can be set only in the area set as Target .) Note1 The area set as I/O Protect is not read unless it is registered to the IOR window or Watch window as an I/O port. To read this area, forcibly read it on these windows. (b) Mapping Address Specify the address to be mapped. Input the higher and lower addresses from the keyboard. (c) These buttons are used to set and delete mapping. When the Mapping Area Target I/O Protect Stack 1Mbyte units 1-byte units Caution If the external memory is mapped, change the value of a register required for access of an external memory.(refer to "5. 1. 4 To change the value of a register required for access of an external memory"). 106 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Table 6-7 Table 6-6 Type of Mapping Attribute Meaning Mapping Unit Mapping Unit CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons OK Cancel Restore Project... About... Help Validates the current environment. Sets the environment and closes this dialog box. Cancels the changes and closes this dialog box. Restores the previous environment settings status before this dialog box was opened. Opens the Project File Load dialog box. If an error occurs while a project file is being opened or read, the ID850QB can no longer continue and is terminated. Opens the About dialog box. Displays the help window of this window. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 107 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Extended Option dialog box This dialog box is used to display and set the extended options of the ID850QB. (Refer to "5. 1 Setting debugging environment".) Figure 6-7 Extended Option Dialog Box - Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons Opening Select [Option ] menu -> [Extended Option ...] . Explanation of each area (1) Trace (2) Timer (3) RAM Monitor (4) On Mouse Click (5) Break Sound (6) Verify Check (7) Clear register when reset 108 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (1) Trace This area is used to set about trace (refer to "5. 10 Trace Function (When IECUBE Connected)") (when IECUBEconnected). (a) Timetag Count Rate: This area is used to set the division ratio of the counter used for time tag display in Trace window. This division ratio is selected from a drop-down list. If the division ratio is set, the number of clocks necessary for counting up the counter displayed for time tag is changed. The relationship between the time tag counter division ratio and maximum measurement time is as follows. Division Ratio TMCLK (1/1) TMCLK (1/2) TMCLK (1/4) TMCLK (1/8) TMCLK (1/16) TMCLK (1/32) TMCLK (1/64) TMCLK (1/128) TMCLK (1/256) TMCLK (1/512) TMCLK (1/1024) TMCLK (1/2048) TMCLK (1/4096) 20 40 80 160 320 640 1280 2560 5120 Table 6-8 Relationship Between Division Ratio and Maximum Measurement Time (Time Tag Counter (Trace)) Resolution (ns) Maximum Measurable Time 1.4 minutes 2.8 minutes 5.7 minutes 11.4 minutes 22.8 minutes 45.6 minutes 1.5 hours 3 hours 6 hours 12.2 hours 24.4 hours 48.8 hours 97.6 hours Timetag counter is 32 bits, In case of 50 MHz external clock Remark 10240 20480 40960 81920 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 109 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (b) Memory Size Set the size of the trace memory (buffer). In other words, specify a memory size by dragging the knob. The sizes that can be specified are 8K (min.), 32K, 64K, 128K, and 256K (max). Caution The larger the value that is set, the greater the number of trace data that are recorded. However, the response when reading trace data becomes correspondingly slower. (c) Clear trace memory before run Select this checkbox to clear the trace memory prior to program execution. (d) Trace Data Select the trace data to be collected. Caution When [Option] menu -> [RRM Function] is selected, the setting is fixed to Branch PC. Table 6-9 Relationship Between Meaning of Trace Data to Be Collected and Trace Collection Mode Branch PC All PC Access Data Branch PC + Access Data Branch PC + Access Data Access Data + Access PC Branch PC + Access Data + Access PC Note1 When selected, unconditional trace results, and qualify trace and section trace cannot be set simultaneously (conditional trace setting is invalid). Note2 In the high-speed priority mode (select Speed Priority in (e) Mode:), when access to the internal RAM area is performed 32 times in succession, data may be missed. 110 Item Branch PC Collects PC values of branch origin and branch destination instructions Traced All PC Collects PC values of all instructionsNot e1 Access PC Collects PC values of instructions that caused access - Access Data Collects access address and access dataNote2 - Traced Traced Traced. - Traced Traced Traced Traced - Traced Traced Traced Traced User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (e) Mode: Specify the trace collection mode. Caution When [Option] menu -> [RRM Function] is selected, the setting is fixed to Speed Priority. This mode performs tracing by prioritizing speed (real-time operation). In this mode, data may be missed depending on the trace data to be collected (refer to "Table 6-9 Relationship Between Meaning of Trace Data to Be Collected and Trace Collection Mode"). This mode performs tracing by prioritizing data collection (non-real-time). Since, in order to reliably collect all the trace data, the CPU's execution pipeline is momentarily stopped when data is likely to be missed, the real-time characteristic of operation in relation to the user program is lost. Trace Priority cannot be selected when Branch PC or All PC is selected in (d) Trace Data . Speed Priority Trace Priority (f) Complement Data Select this checkbox to perform complementary display of trace data. (2) Timer Set the rate value for the timer counter. The rate value is selected from a drop-down list. Division Ratio TMCLK (1/1) TMCLK (1/2) TMCLK (1/4) TMCLK (1/8) TMCLK (1/16) TMCLK (1/32) TMCLK (1/64) TMCLK (1/128) TMCLK (1/256) TMCLK (1/512) TMCLK (1/1024) TMCLK (1/2048) TMCLK (1/4096) 20 40 80 160 320 640 1280 2560 5120 Table 6-10 Relationship Between Division Ratio and Maximum Measurement Time (Timer Count (Timer)) Resolution (ns) Maximum Measurable Time 2.8 minutes 5.7 minutes 11.4 minutes 22.8 minutes 45.6 minutes 1.5 hours 3 hours 6 hours 12.2 hours 24.4 hours 48.8 hours 97.6 hours 195.2 hours Timer counter is 33bits, In case of 50 MHz external clock Remark 10240 20480 40960 81920 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 111 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (3) RAM Monitor (a) Area This area is used to set about RAM monitor function (refer to "5. 12. 3 RAM monitor function" ). Whole RAM sampling is to be performed, the entire memory space is the target. Note: The user program execution is stopped for a long time when a large number of windows are opened because the range from which memory is read out is wid. RAM sampling is to be performed, only the internal RAM area and the peripheral I/ O register area are the target . Disables RAM monitor function. (default) IRAM+IOR Off (b) Redraw Interval Specify the sampling time (ms) of the RRM function (refer to "5. 12 The real-time RAM monitor function"). The sampling time can be specified in 100-ms units from 0 to 65500. If 0 is specified, or if this area is blank, the data is not displayed in real time. (4) On Mouse Click This area is used to select whether a software breakpoint or hardware breakpoint is set as the default breakpoint if a breakpoint is set in the point mark area by clicking the mouse button in the Source window or Assemble window(refer to "5. 4. 2 Breakpoint setting"). Soft break Hard break Sets a software breakpoint (default). The mark of breakpoint is displayed in blue. Sets a hardware breakpoint. The mark of breakpoint is displayed in red (5) Break Sound If the check box is checked, a beep sound is issued when a break occurs. 112 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (6) Verify Check This area is used to specify whether a verify check is performed when data has been written to memory. A verify check is performed when download, memory fill, or memory copy is executed .A verify check is also performed when a variable or data is changed in the Watch window or the Memory window and is written to memory. Caution When N-Wire CARD is connected, during write to the internal flash memory (including download), verify check is not performed whether or not the checkbox in this area is selected, and internal verify of flash self-write is always performed (read verify is not performed). (7) Clear register when reset Select this checkbox in order to clear the program registers (r1 to r31) and registers EIPC, EIPSW, FEPC, FEPSW, CTPC, CTPSW, and CTBP upon CPU reset. Under the default setting, the registers are not cleared. Function buttons OK Cancel Restore Help Validates the settings and closes this dialog box. Cancels the changes and closes this dialog box. Restores the previous settings before this dialog box was opened. Displays the help window of this window. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 113 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Fail-safe Break dialog box IECUBE This dialog box is used to perform the fail-safe break settings. (Refer to "5. 1 Setting debugging environment".) When a project file is read, the results obtained by reading this project file are reflected in this dialog box. Remark For details on the fail-safe break function, refer to the user's manuals of the in-circuit emulator and the emulation board that are used. Figure 6-8 Fail-safe Break dialog box - Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons Opening Click the Explanation of each area (1) Protect (2) Verify (1) Protect The fail-safe break protect settings are performed in this area. The fail-safe breaks corresponding to the selected checkboxes are protected. Under the default setting, all checkboxes are selected. (a) Internal ROM: 114 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE This area is used to perform the protect settings for the internal ROM area. Non Map Write Access to access prohibited area Write to write prohibited area (b) Internal RAM: This area is used to perform the protect settings for the internal RAM area. Non Map Access to access prohibited area (c) I/O Register: This area is used to perform the protect settings for the peripheral I/O registers area. Non Map Read Write Access to access prohibited area Read to read prohibited area Write to write prohibited area (d) External Memory: This area is used to perform the protect settings for the external memory area. Non Map Access to access prohibited area (2) Verify This area is used to perform the verify settings for fail-safe breaks. Verify check is performed during access to the items corresponding to the selected checkboxes. (a)Internal RAM: This area is used to perform the verify check setting in the internal RAM area. Non Map Write Write to write prohibited area Function buttons OK Cancel Help Validates the settings and closes this dialog box. Closes this dialog box. Displays this dialog box online help files. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 115 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE RRM dialog box IECUBE This dialog box is used to set the sampling range for the RRM function. (Refer to "5. 12 The real-time RAM monitor function".) Up to 8 locations can be specified in 256-byte units as the sampling range. The total of the sizes specified for the 8 locations cannot exceed 2048 bytes. Caution This dialog box cannot be opened when [Option] menu -> [Trace Function] is selected. Figure 6-9 RRM dialog box - Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons Opening The settings of this dialog box when it is opened differ depending on the opening method. (a) When settings are performed from RRM dialog box The dialog box is opened by selecting [Option] menu -> [RRM Setting...]. In this case, the data in (1) Address and (2) Size are input manually. (b) When settings are performed from the Memory window This dialog box is opened by opening the Memory window, selecting an address in the window, and then selecting [RRM Setting...] from the context menu. In this case, the selected address is displayed in an empty row in (1) Address, 256 bytes is displayed in an empty row in (2) Size, and the value obtained by converting the address to a symbol is displayed in an empty row in (3) Symbol. However, if the total of the sizes specified for the 8 locations already exceeds 2048 bytes, the dialog box opens but no value can be set. (c) When settings are performed from the Watch window This dialog box is opened by opening the Watch window, selecting a variable in the window, and then 116 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE selecting [RRM Setting...] from the context menu. In this case, the value obtained by converting the variable into an address is displayed in an empty row in (1) Address, 256 bytes is displayed in an empty row in (2) Size, and the value obtained by converting the variable to a symbol is displayed in an empty row in (3) Symbol. However, if the total of the sizes specified for the 8 locations already exceeds 2048 bytes, the dialog box opens but no value can be set. Explanation of each area (1) Address (2) Size (3) Symbol (4) Size Total (1) Address This area is used to specify the sampling start address for the RRM function. The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal. An address can be also specified by a symbol or Following input, click the This area is used to specify the sampling range from (1) Address. The values that can be selected are 256, 512, 768, 1024, 1280, 1536, 1792, and 2048. However, the total of the sizes specified for the 8 locations cannot exceed 2048 bytes. expression. (Refer to "Table 5-6 Specifying Symbols".) User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 117 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (3) Symbol This area displays the symbols of the addresses specified in (1) Address. The specified addresses are displayed as a symbol or as a symbol + offset. If the address has not been set, nothing is displayed. (4) Size Total This area displays the total of the sizes specified in (2) Size. red. If the total exceeds 2048 bytes, it is displayed in Function buttons OK Cancel Restore Default Delete Jump Validates the settings and closes this dialog box. Closes this dialog box. Restores the input data to the original status. Clears the current setting and sets the internal RAM start address in the first row in (1) Address, and 2048 in the first row in (2) Size. Deletes the setting for the numbers with a focus. Opens the Memory window and displays the addresses in (1) Address whose numbers have a focus. Jump is performed for Memory window that are in the active status. If multiple memory windows are to be opened, they must be set in the static status. (Refer to "5. 14. 1 Active Status and Static Status") Enables the settings. Displays this dialog box online help files. Apply Help 118 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Debugger Option dialog box This dialog box is used to display and set the various options of the ID850QB. Figure 6-10 Debugger Option Dialog Box - Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons Opening Select [Option] menu -> [Debugger Option...]. Explanation of each area (1) Source Path (2) Default Extension (3) Open File History (4) Font (5) Project File (6) Tool Bar Pictures (7) Kanji (8) Tab Size (9) Startup Routine (10) DisAssemble User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 119 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (11) Watch Default (1) Source Path This area is used to specify the directory in which a source file or text file is searched. (a) Base : The directory is the basis of a relative path is displayed. The base directory is determined in the following sequence: 1) 2) 3) Directory to which the project file has been loaded Directory to which a load module or hex file has been loaded last Current directory of Windows (b) Text box This area is used to specify the directory searched. To specify a directory, either directly input one to the text box, or click the 120 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (2) Default Extension This area is used to specify the default extension. Delimit extensions with " " (blank),";" (semicolon) or "," (comma). Source File Set the extension of a source file that is displayed when the Browse dialog box is opened by selecting [File] menu -> [Open...]. The default extension is " *.c, *.s ". Set the extension of a load module that is displayed when the Download dialog box is opened. The default extension is " *.out ". Load Module (3) Open File History This area is used to set the number of histories of the open file displayed in the bottom field of the [File] menu. The default value is 4. If 0 is set, no history is displayed on the menu. (4) Font This area is used to specify the font displayed on the Source window, the Watch window, the Quick Watch dialog box, the Local Variable window, and the Stack Trace window. Clicking the (a) Auto Save Sets whether the project file is automatically saved at the ID850QB termination. On Off Query Automatically saves the project file at the ID850QB termination. Does not automatically save the project file at the ID850QB termination. Displays the Exit Debugger dialog box at the ID850QB termination (default). User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 121 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (b)Auto Load Sets whether the project file is automatically loaded at the ID850QB start up. On Off Automatically loads the project file at the ID850QB start up. Specify the project file to be loaded in the (c) Load Project File. Does not automatically loads the project file at the ID850QB start up. (default) Load Project File (c) Specify the project file to be loaded automatically. Set a project file name by inputting from the keyboard or clicking the This area sets the buttons to be displayed on the toolbar. (Refer to " Toolbar".) Pictures and Text Pictures only Displays a button on which a graphic and character are displayed. Displays a button with only graphic (default). (7) Kanji Cannot be selected. (8) Tab Size This area is used to set the tab size for each extension when files are displayed. (a) Extension Set an extension. Input an extension from the keyboard, or select one from the drop-down list. (b) Tab Size Select the tab size. Select how many spaces are displayed as a tab code (2, 4, or 8) . (c) Tab List Displays the tab size set for each extension. (d) 122 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (e) This area is used to specify the first address , end address, and display start symbol of the text area (code area) of the start-up routine by symbols. The source file can be opened if an object file in the load module format is downloaded in the Download dialog box. Begin label End label main() label Specifies the symbol of the first address (default : _start) Specifies the symbol of the end address (default : _startend) Specifies the display start symbol (default _main) Caution1 If the specified symbol is not correct, the source file cannot be opened until the PC reaches the address range of the corresponding source file. In addition, the start-up routine cannot be skipped by step execution. Caution2 Be sure to specify this area. If this area is blank, the dialog box cannot be closed. (10) DisAssemble This area is used to set for disassemble display. (a) Show Offset Specifies whether an offset (symbol + offset) is displayed during disassemble display. When the offset is not displayed, only a symbol that matches a numeric value is displayed, if any. If no matching symbol is found, the numeric value is displayed as a hexadecimal number unchanged. Label Mnemonic Specifies whether the offset is displayed in the Label field. In the default condition, the offset is not displayed. Specifies whether the offset is displayed in the Mnemonic field. In the default condition, the offset is displayed. (b) Register Name This area is used to select the method of displaying register names in mnemonics during disassemble display. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 123 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function Name Absolute Name Displays register names as function names or nicknames (default). Displays register names as absolute names. (11) Watch Default This area is used to specify a symbol to be watched in the Watch window etc. . (a) Size Sets the default display size of data if [Adaptive] is specified. Byte Half Word Word 8-bit display(default) 16-bit display(default) 32-bit display(default) (b) Radix Sets the default radix in which data is to be displayed if [Proper] is specified. Hex Dec Oct Bin String Displays data in hexadecimal numbers (default). Displays data in decimal numbers. Displays data in octal numbers. Displays data in binary numbers. Displays data in character strings. (c) Show Variable Type Select the display/non-display of variable type is specified. On Off Displays the type of a variable. Does not display the type of a variable (default). (d) Language Select the display/non-display of type of variable is specified. C ASM Displays a C-like base number (default). Cannot be selected. 124 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons OK Cancel Restore Help Validates the settings and closes this dialog box. Cancels the changings and closes this dialog box. Restores the previous settings before this dialog box was opened. Displays this dialog box online help files. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 125 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Project File Save dialog box This dialog box is used to save the current debugging environment to a project file. Debugging environment (project file)".) Project files can be newly saved or saved as in this dialog box. Figure 6-12 Project File Save Dialog Box (Refer to "5. 13. 1 - Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons Opening Select [File] menu -> [Project] -> [Save As...]. (To save a file of same name as a project file previously loaded or saved, select [File] menu -> [Project] -> [Save].) 126 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of each area (1) Save in:, File name: (2) Save as type: (1) Save in:, File name: This area is used to specify a file name. A file name can be directly input from the keyboard, or selected from the list at the upper part of this area. Up to 257 character string with a extension can be specified. (2) Save as type: This area is used to specify the extension (*.prj) of the project file to be saved. If the extension is omitted, "*.prj" is appended as the default extension. Function buttons Save Cancel Help Saves the debugging environment to the selected file. After saving, the dialog box is closed. Closes this dialog box without saving the file. Displays this dialog box online help files. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 127 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Project File Load dialog box This dialog box is used to restore the debugging environment to the debugging environment saved to the project file. (Refer to "5. 13. 1 Debugging environment (project file)") If there is an active Source window after a project file has been loaded, it is displayed at the top. Caution If, following ID850QB startup, a project file with settings that differ from those of the target device at startup has been loaded, the target device specified at startup is used. Figure 6-13 Project File Load Dialog Box - Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons Opening Click the Proj button, select [File] menu -> [Project] -> [Open...]. 128 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of each area (1) Look In:, File name : (2) Files of type : (1) Look In:, File name : This area is used to specify the file name to be loaded. A file name can be directly input from the keyboard, or selected from the list. Up to 257 character string with a extension can be specified. (2) Files of type : This area is used to specify the extension (*.prj) of the file to be loaded. Function buttons Open Cancel Help Loads the selected file. After loading the file, this dialog box is closed. Closes this dialog box without executing anything. Displays this dialog box online help files. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 129 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Download dialog box This dialog box is used to select the name and format of a file to be downloaded, and downloads memory contents to the in-circuit emulator and the target system. (Refer to "5. 2 Download Function / Upload Function"). If a load module file has been downloaded, the corresponding source file is searched, and the Source window is automatically opened. Caution If a file other than a load module file is loaded, source debugging cannot be executed. Figure 6-14 Download Dialog Box Remark The following dialog box appears while downloading and the downloading can be can celled at any time. This dialog box is closed automatically after completing downloading. Figure 6-15 The Progress of Download - Opening - Explanation of each area 130 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE - Function buttons Opening Click the Load button, or select [File] menu -> [Download...]. Explanation of each area (1) Look In:, File name: (2) Files of type: (3) Load (4) Reset (5) Offset Address (1) Look In:, File name: This area is used to specify a file name. A file name can be directly input from the keyboard, or selected from the list at the upper part of this area. Two or more files can be specified in this dialog box. To specify two or more files, delimit each file name with " " (double quotation mark). Files can also be specified by clicking the mouse button while holding down the Shift or Ctrl key. Up to 20 load module files can be downloaded. Up to 257 character string with a extension can be specified. (2) Files of type: That Can Be Downloaded".) Remark These are default extensions; other extensions can also be used. The default extension of the displayed load module can also be specified in the Debugger Option dialog box. (3) Load This area is used to set a load condition. This setting is valid only if a file in the load module format is specified. This setting is valid only if a file in the load module format is specified. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM This area is used to specify the type (extension) of the file to be downloaded. (Refer to "Table 5-3 Type of File 131 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Symbol Specifies whether symbol information is read (when checked, default) or not. The memory capacity can be saved by not reading symbol information when a program consisting of two or more load module files is to be debugged and if the symbol information of some modules does not have to be read. Specifies whether object information is read (when checked, default) or not. (The object information is read even if this button is not checked when a HEX file is loaded.) Specifies whether the contents of the internal flash memory are erased all before download (when checked, default) or not . (N-Wire CARD) Object Erase (4) Reset This area is used to set a reset condition. This setting is valid only if a file in the load module format is specified. Symbol Specifies whether symbol information is reset (when checked, default) or not. Caution When debugging a program consisting of two or more load module files, load each one of the load module files without resetting the symbol information. When downloading two or more load module files, take care that location addresses do not overlap. Specifies whether the CPU is reset or not (not checked, default). CPU (5) Offset Address This area is used to specify the offset address that is used when a file is loaded (for binary data, specify the start Symbols"".). The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal. Function buttons Open Cancel Help Restore Loads the selected file. After loading the file, this dialog box is closed. Closes this dialog box without loading the file. Displays this dialog box online help files. Restores the input data to the original status. 132 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM address). An address can be also specified by a symbol or expression. (Refer to "Table 5-6 Specifying CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Upload dialog box This dialog box is used to set the name and format of the file to be saved, and save the set memory contents, etc., to that file. (Refer to "5. 2 Download Function / Upload Function") Figure 6-16 Upload Dialog Box - Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons Opening Select [File] menu -> [Upload...]. Explanation of each area (1) Save in :, File name : (2) Files of type : (3) Save Address User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 133 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (1) Save in :, File name : This area is used to specify the file name to be saved. A file name can be directly input from the keyboard, or selected from the list. Up to 257 character string with a extension can be specified. (2) Files of type : This area is used to specify the type (extension) of the file to be saved. Be Downloaded") However, if "All (*.*) " is selected, the data is saved in the default Intel extended Hex format. Remark Extensions other than those listed can also be used. (3) Save Address This area is used to specify the range of address to be saved. The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal. Function buttons Save Cancel Help Restore Saves the file according to the setting. Closes this dialog box without executing anything. Displays this dialog box online help files. Restores the status before this dialog box was opened. 134 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM An address can be also specified by a symbol or expression. (Refer to "Table 5-6 Specifying Symbols") The format of the data to be saved is determined by the extension. (Refer to "Table 5-3 Type of File That Can CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Load Module List dialog box This dialog box can be used to check the file name and file path name of a load module that has already been downloaded. (Refer to "5. 2 Download Function / Upload Function") By using the - Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons Opening Select [File] menu -> [Load Module...]. Explanation of each area (1) Module list (2) Add Path User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 135 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (1) Module list This area displays the names of the load module files that have already been downloaded. (a) No. The numbers displayed indicate the sequence in which the load module file names were read. (b) File name The file names are displayed with the full path if (2) Add Path is checked; otherwise, only the file names will be displayed. Caution If symbol information has been reset in the Reset Debugger dialog box, or if symbol information has been reset in the Download dialog box, the load module file names downloaded before that are cleared. (2) Add Path This should be checked to specify load module file names are displayed with the path in the (1) Module list. Function buttons Close Help Download... Closes this dialog box. Displays this dialog box online help files. Opens the Download dialog box. A new load module can be downloaded. The file name of the newly downloaded module will be added to the file name display area when the Download dialog box is closed. 136 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Source window This dialog box is used to displays source files or text files. (Refer to "5. 3 Source Display, Disassemble Display Function".) In addition to Breakpoint setting and Mixed display mode (Source window), a number of other operations using Context menu, Function buttons, etc., can be performed in this window. Moreover, there are two statuses, Active Status and Static Status, for this window. When the window is in the active status, it has Trace Result with Linking Window (when IECUBE connected). Moreover, the items selected in the window with Drag & drop function can be used in another window. (Refer to "5. 14 Functions Common to Various Windows".) Caution if program codes is described in an include file and these codes are included in multiple files, the line numbers and addresses do not correspond on a one-to-one bases. In such an include file, function that indicates the correspondence relationship between line numbers and addresses dose not correctly operate. Figure 6-18 Source window - Opening - Explanation of each area - [View] menu (Source window-dedicated items) - Context menu - Function buttons Opening Click the Src button, select [Browse]menu -> [Source Text]. (This window is automatically opened if the User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 137 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE corresponding source file exists after the download module file has been downloaded. ) Explanation of each area (1) Point mark area (2) Current PC mark area (3) Line number/address display area (4) Source text display area (1) Point mark area This area is used for Event Setting Status (Event Mark), program code display, and Breakpoint setting. Caution The program code is displayed only when the symbol information downloaded by the load module is read. Breakpoints can be set or deleted by clicking with the mouse on this program code. (if "*" is not displayed for the line, the breakpoint is set on the line above or below the line, whichever has "*" displayed). If an event has been set for the corresponding line, one of the marks listed in the following table is displayed. The color of the "B" mark differs according to the breakpoint type and status. (When a breakpoint is set in this area, it is enabled at the same time that it is set.) Mark B (blue) B (red) B (green) B (black) Software breakpoint is set. Valid hardware breakpoint (after execution) is set. Valid hardware breakpoint (before execution) is set. Note: Breaks before execution are set with priority. Invalid hardware breakpoint is set. This hardware breakpoint can be validated on the Event Manager or in the Break dialog box. Event condition is set. Event link condition is set. Trace event is set..(IECUBE) Timer event is set. (IECUBE) Multiple events are set. E L T Ti A 138 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Table 6-11 Event Setting Status (Event Mark) Meaning CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Remark If an address range is specified as the address condition of the event, the lower addresses of the range are displayed. The mask specification of the address condition is not reflected. (2) Current PC mark area The mark '>', which indicates the current PC value (PC register value), is displayed in this area. Clicking this mark with the mouse displays a pop-up window that shows the PC register value. By double-clicking the current PC mark area, the program can be executed up to a specified line. (3) Line number/address display area This area displays the line numbers of a source file or text file. Red indicates line numbers for which corresponding program code exists, and black indicates line numbers for which corresponding program code does not exist. In the Mixed display mode (Source window), disassemble display addresses are displayed in gray. (4) Source text display area This area displays source files and text files. Yellow indicates the current PC line, and red indicates lines where a valid breakpoint is set. In the Mixed display mode (Source window), source lines are displayed in the regular color. Moreover, this area also provides the following functions for lines (start address of program code) and addresses where the cursor has been placed. - Drag & drop function - Context menu User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM - [Come Here] , [Start From Here] (Refer to "Table 5-9 Type of Execution") 139 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Caution If a Program code does not exist on the source line, the top address of the line above or below the line on which a program code exists is manipulated by these functions. . These functions cannot be performed in the following cases. The corresponding menu will be dimmed and cannot be selected. - If a file other than a source file is displayed - While the user program is being executed [View] menu (Source window-dedicated items) The following items are added in the [View] menu, when the Source window is active. Create Break Event Break when Access to this Variable Break when Write to this Variable Break when Read from this Variable Clear Event? Sets a break event that occurs if the selected variable is accessed. Sets a break event that occurs if the selected variable is accessed for read/ write. Sets a break event that occurs if the selected variable is accessed for write. Sets a break event that occurs if the selected variable is accessed for read. Deletes a break event corresponding to the selected variable. Displays the event information of a line at the cursor position or a selected variable name. If an event is set, the Event dialog box is opened. Turns on/off Mixed display mode (Source window). Mix Context menu Move... Mix Add Watch... Symbol... Moves the display position. Opens the Source Text move dialog box. Turns on/off Mixed display mode (Source window). Adds the specified data to the Watch window. Opens the Add Watch dialog box. Displays the address of the specified variable or function, or the value of the specified symbol. Opens the Symbol To Address dialog box. Sets a break event that occurs if the selected variable is accessed for read/ write. Sets a break event that occurs if the selected variable is accessed for write. Sets a break event that occurs if the selected variable is accessed for read. Deletes a break event corresponding to the selected variable. Break when Access to this Variable Break when Write to this Variable Break when Read from this Variable Clear 140 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Event? Displays the event information of a line at the cursor position or a selected variable name. If an event is set, the Event dialog box is opened. Executes the program from the current PC to the cursor position. (Refer to "Table 5-7 Break Types".) Sets the address at the cursor position to the PC. Sets or deletes a hardware breakpoint at the cursor position. Remark: Breaks before execution (B) are set with priority. Sets or deletes a software breakpoint at the cursor position. Disassembles and displays starting from the jump destination address specified by the data value at the cursor position. (Refer to "5. 14. 2 Jump function".) Opens the Assemble window. If an active Assemble window is open, that window is displayed in the forefront (so that it can be manipulated). Displays the memory contents starting from the jump destination address specified by the data value at the cursor position. (Refer to "5. 14. 2 Jump function".) Opens the Memory window. If an active Memory window is open, that window is displayed in the forefront (so that it can be manipulated). Come Here Change PC Break Point Software Break Point Assemble Memory Function buttons Search... Opens the Source Search dialog box and searches a character string of the source text. If a character string is selected in the source text display area, the Source Search dialog box is opened to search the character string. If no character string is selected, the Source Search dialog box is opened with nothing specified to be searched. Specify a search method in the Source Search dialog box. The result of search is highlighted in the Source window. This is the same operation as selecting [View] menu -> [Search...]. Searches forward (upward on screen) for the text that satisfies the search condition set in the Source Search dialog box, starting from the address at the cursor position. This button is displayed as the << >> Stop(during a search) Watch Quick... Refresh Close User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 141 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Source Search dialog box This dialog box is used to search the contents of a file in the Source window. (Refer to "5. 3. 1 Source display") By setting each item and then clicking the - Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons Opening When the Source window is the current window, select [View] menu -> [Search...], or click the Explanation of each area (1) Find What (2) Match Case (3) Direction 142 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (1) Find What This area is used to specify the data to be searched. (Up to 256 character.) In the default condition, the string selected in the window that called this dialog box is displayed. As necessary, the character string displayed can be changed. Up to 16 input histories can be recorded. (2) Match Case This should be checked to distinguish between uppercase and lowercase. (3) Direction This area is used to specify the direction of the search. Up Down Forward search. Searches data forward (upward on screen) from the current position of the cursor. Backward search. Searches data backward (downward on screen) from the current position of the cursor (default). Function buttons Find Next Searches the specified data in accordance with a given condition. If the specified character string is found as a result of a search, it is highlighted. To continue searching, click this button again. Sets the specified condition as the search condition and closes this dialog box. Stops searching. Closes this dialog box. (During searching, this button is replaced by the Set Find Stop(during searching) Cancel Help User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 143 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Source Text move dialog box This dialog box is used to specify a file to be displayed in the Source window and the position from which displaying the file is to be started. (Refer to "5. 3. 1 Source display".) Figure 6-20 Source Text Move Dialog Box - Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons Opening When the Source window is the current window, select [View] menu -> [Move...]. Explanation of each area (1) Option (2) To (1) Option This area is used to select the input mode when the display start position is specified. (a) Address/Symbol This should be selected to specify by an address (or symbol). (b) Line/File This should be selected to specify by by a line number (or file name). To search the file name, use the 144 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE This area is used to specify the file name or address to be displayed. Up to 16 input histories can be recorded. (a) When the (a) Address/Symbol is selected Specifies the address from which display is to be started. The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal. An address can be also specified by a symbol Clicking the Function buttons OK Cancel Restore Help Starts displaying the source text from the specified position. Closes this dialog box. Restores the status before this dialog box was opened. Displays this dialog box online help files. or a expression. (Refer to "Table 5-6 Specifying Symbols".) User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 145 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Assemble window This window is used to disassemble and display programs. It is also used to execute online assembly. (Refer to "5. 3 Source Display, Disassemble Display Function".) The results of online assembly are also reflected in the Memory window. In addition to Breakpoint setting , a number of other operations using Context menu, Function buttons, etc., can be performed in this window. Moreover, there are two statuses, Active Status and Static Status, for this window. When the window is in the active status, it has a Trace Result with Linking Window (when IECUBE connected). Moreover, the items selected in the window with the Drag & drop function can be used in another window. (Refer to "5. 14 Functions Common to Various Windows".) Figure 6-21 Assemble window - Opening - Explanation of each area - [View] menu (Assemble window-dedicated items) - Context menu - Function buttons - Related operations Opening Click the Asm button, select [Browse] menu -> [Assemble] . 146 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of each area (1) Point mark area (2) Current PC mark area (3) Address specification area (4) Disassemble display area (1) Point mark area This area is used for Event Setting Status (Event Mark) and Breakpoint setting. (2) Current PC mark area The mark '>', which indicates the current PC value (PC register value), is displayed in this area. By double-clicking the current PC mark area, the program can be executed up to a specified line. (3) Address specification area This area displays the disassembly start address. (4) Disassemble display area This area displays the labels and code data of addresses, and disassembled mnemonics. This area displays source files and text files. where a valid breakpoint is set. It can be Online assembly in the mnemonic field. This area also provides the following functions: Yellow indicates the current PC line, and red indicates lines - Drag & drop function User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM - [Come Here] , [Start From Here] (Refer to "Table 5-9 Type of Execution") 147 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE - Context menu [View] menu (Assemble window-dedicated items) The following items are added in the [View] menu, when the Assemble window is active. Event? Displays the event information of the address at the cursor position. If an event is set, the Event dialog box is opened. Context menu Move... Add Watch... Symbol... Moves the display position. Opens the Address move dialog box. Adds the specified data to the Watch window. Opens the Add Watch dialog box. Displays the address of the specified variable or function, or the value of the specified symbol. Opens the Symbol To Address dialog box. Executes the program from the current PC to the cursor position. (Refer to "Table 5-7 Break Types".) Sets the address at the cursor position to the PC. Sets or deletes a hardware breakpoint at the cursor position. Remark: Breaks before execution (B) are set with priority. Sets or deletes a software breakpoint at the cursor position. Displays the corresponding source text and source line, using the data value at the cursor position as the jump destination address. (Refer to "5. 14. 2 Jump function".) If no line information exists at the jump destination address, however, you cannot jump. Opens the Source window. If an active Source window is open, that window is displayed in the forefront (so that it can be manipulated). Displays the memory contents starting from the jump destination address specified by the data value at the cursor position. (Refer to "5. 14. 2 Jump function".) Opens the Memory window. If an active Memory window is open, that window is displayed in the forefront (so that it can be manipulated). Come Here Change PC Break Point Software Break Point Source Text Memory Function buttons Search... Opens the Assemble Search dialog box and searches for a character string of mnemonics. Specify a search method in the Assemble Search dialog box. The result of search is highlighted in the Assemble window. This is the same operation as selecting [View] menu -> [Search...]. Searches forward (upward on screen) for the contents that satisfy the search condition set in the Assemble Search dialog box, starting from the address at the cursor position. This button is displayed as the << 148 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE >> Searches backward (downward on screen) for the contents that satisfy the search condition set in the Assemble Search dialog box, starting from the address at the cursor position. This button is displayed as the Stop(during a search) Watch Quick... Refresh Close Related operations (1) Online assembly To change the disassembled contents, move the cursor to the mnemonic field (the overwrite and insertion modes are alternately selected by pressing the Insert key). If an attempt is made to move the cursor to another line after the disassembled contents have been changed in the mnemonic field, the new contents are checked. If the new contents are illegal, the code data on the line where the contents have been changed is indicated as '*'. The contents changed in the mnemonic field are written into the memory by pressing the Enter key. By pressing the Enter key, the new contents are checked. If even one line is illegal, the new contents are not written into the memory. To discard the contents, press the ESC key. If the contents are correct and if the Enter key is pressed, the contents are written to the memory, and then the cursor moves to the next line in the mnemonic field, so that the data on the next line can be changed. Caution If the number of new instruction bytes is less than the number of previous instruction bytes as a result of changing, as many 'NOP' instructions as necessary are inserted. If the number of new instruction bytes is more than the number of previous instruction bytes, the next instruction is overwritten. In this case also, as many 'NOP' instructions as necessary are inserted. The same applies to instructions that straddle over source lines. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 149 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Assemble Search dialog box This dialog box is used to search the contents in the Assemble window . (Refer to "5. 3. 2 Disassemble display".) Successive character strings included in an input character string and disassembler character string are compared as one blank character. By setting each item and then clicking the - Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons Opening When the Assemble window is the current window, select [View] menu -> [Search...], or click the Explanation of each area (1) Find What (2) Match Case (3) Scan Whole Region (4) Direction (5) Address (1) Find What This area is used to specify the data to be searched (up to 256 character). In the default condition, the string selected in the window that called this dialog box is displayed. As necessary, the character string displayed can be changed.Up to 16 input histories can be recorded. 150 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (2) Match Case This should be checked to distinguish between uppercase and lowercase. (3) Scan Whole Region This should be checked to search the entire specified range. (4) Direction This area is used to specify the direction of the search. Up Down Forward search. Searches data forward (upward on screen) from the current position of the cursor. Backward search. Searches data backward (downward on screen) from the current position of the cursor (default). (5) Address This area is used to specify the address to be searched. The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal. An address can be also specified by a symbol or Function buttons Find Next Searches the specified data in accordance with a given condition. If the specified character string is found as a result of a search, it is highlighted. To continue searching, click this button again. Sets the specified condition as the search condition and closes this dialog box. Stops searching. Closes this dialog box.(During searching, this button is replaced by the Set Find Stop(searching) Cancel Help expression. (Refer to "Table 5-6 Specifying Symbols".) User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 151 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Address move dialog box This dialog box is used to specify the start address from which displaying, as follows. - Memory window - Assemble window - IOR window Figure 6-23 Address Move Dialog Box (Example: When Memory Window Is Open) - Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons Opening When the target window is the current window, select [View] menu -> [Move...]. Explanation of each area (1) To This area is used to specify an address. In the default condition, the string selected in the window that called this dialog box, or the current PC value etc. is displayed. As necessary, the character string displayed can be changed. The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal. An address can be also specified by a symbol or Function buttons OK Cancel Restore Help The corresponding window is displayed from the address. Closes this dialog box. Restores the status before this dialog box was opened. Displays this dialog box online help files. 152 expression. (Refer to "Table 5-6 Specifying Symbols".) Up to 16 input histories can be recorded. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Symbol To Address dialog box This dialog box is used to display the address of the specified variable or function, or the value of the specified symbol. (Refer to "5. 3 Source Display, Disassemble Display Function".) Figure 6-24 Symbol To Address Dialog Box - Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons Opening Select [View] menu -> [Symbol...]. Explanation of each area (1) Symbol (2) Conversion result display area (3) Radix User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 153 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (1) Symbol This area is used to specify the variable, function name, symbol name, or line number to be converted. (Refer to The default radix for inputting a numeric value is decimal. Up to 16 input histories can be recorded. To change the contents of this area, click the If bit symbol have been specified, they are converted to the Address.bit format. Also, equations that include bit symbols cannot be specified. The variable, address of the function, value of the symbol, address of the line number, or value of the expression specified in the (1) Symbol is displayed. The address value of an I/O port name or peripheral I/O registers name, the register contents of a register name, or flag value of a PSW flag name is displayed. (3) Radix This area is used to select the radix of the data to be displayed in the (2) Conversion result display area. Hex Dec Oct Bin Hexadecimal number (default) Decimal number Octal number Binary number Function buttons OK Cancel Restore Help 154 "Table 5-6 Specifying Symbols".) If the contents of the (1) Symbol have been changed, converts the symbol. After conversion, closes the dialog box if the contents of the (1) Symbolhave not been changed. Closes this dialog box. Restores the input data to the original status. If the User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Watch window This window is used to display and change specified watch data. (Refer to "5. 6 Watch Function".) This window can also display wide-ranging watch data (such as global variables and public symbols) in real time even during program execution, in the same way as the Memory window. The result of updating and rewriting data in this window will be reflected in the Memory window. Watch data registration is done by pressing the - Opening - Explanation of each area - [View] menu (Watch window-dedicated items) - Context menu - Function buttons Opening Click the Wch button, or select [Browse] menu -> [Watch]. Explanation of each area (1) Left field (symbol name display area) (2) Right field (data value display/setting area) User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 155 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (1) Left field (symbol name display area) This area is used to display variable names, symbol names and types, and tag names of structures or unions. '+' is prefixed to the displayed arrays, pointer variables, and structures or unions. These variables are expanded and displayed as follows when they are double-clicked: First characte r + Array, pointer variable, or structure/union Expanded display is performed by double-clicking "+" (first character changes from "+" to "-"). Array Pointer variable Structure/union By double-clicking the '+', all the elements of the variable are displayed in accordance with the type of the array variable. By double-clicking the '+', the data indicated by the pointer is displayed. By double-clicking the '+', all the members of the structure/union are displayed in accordance with the type of the member variable. If a structure or union is defined in the structure or union, the structure name or union name of the internal structure or union is also displayed. The internal structure or union can be also expanded by using '+'. Expanded display variable Expanded display is canceled by double-clicking "-" (first character changes from "-" to "+"). Remark If an array has too many variables and takes too long to expand, a warning message is displayed. Registered watch data changes are performed in the Change Watch dialog box opened by selecting the item to be changed and then selecting Context menu -> [Change Watch...]. A line with an expanded hierarchy, such as the elements of an array, and members of structures and unions cannot be deleted. If an access breakpoint is set for a variable or a symbol in the Watch window, the symbol name display area is highlighted in gold. 156 Table 6-12 Watch Window Display Format (Symbol) Meaning User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (2) Right field (data value display/setting area) This area is used to display and change watch data values. A value is updated when execution is stopped. To save a value, select [File ] menu -> [Save As...]. This area is blank if getting data has failed. Values are changed through direct input. The location to be changed is displayed in red and the contents of the change are written into the target memory when the Enter key is pressed. The previous value can be canceled by the ESC key. The display format is as follows: Display Data Integer Hexadecimal (0xxxxx) Decimal (xxxx) Octal (0xxxx\) Binary (0bxxxx) "Character" Member name Character Enumeration type If scope is specified Floating-point type Displayed in accordance with specified scope. Single precision/double precision supported The input/display format is as follows: [ + | - ] inf [ + | - ] nan [ + | - ] integer e [ + | - ]exponent [ + | - ] integer.fraction[ e [ + | - ]exponent Data that has been invalidated because of a change in the scope or optimized compiling '?' Remark The radix of a data value can be changed on the Context menu for each variable. The display format of "integer" can be changed on the Debugger Option dialog box. Table 6-13 Watch Window Display Format (Data) Contents User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 157 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE [View] menu (Watch window-dedicated items) When this window is the current window, The following items are added on [View] menu. Create Break Event Beak when Access to this Variable Break when Write to this Variable Break when Read from this Variable Clear Event? Bin Oct Dec Hex String Proper Creates a break event by using the selected item as follows. Creates a break event that can be accessed for read/write. Creates a break event that can be accessed for write. Creates a break event that can be accessed for read. Deletes a break event corresponding to the selected item. Displays the event information of the variable selected. If an event is set, the Event dialog box is opened. Displays binary numbers. Displays octal numbers. Displays decimal numbers. Displays octal numbers. Displays character strings. Displays the default value of each variable . Symbols are displayed in accordance with the setting of the Debugger Option dialog box (default). Displays in 8-bit units. Displays in 16-bit units. Displays in 32-bit units. Displays the default value of each variable (default). Only this item is valid for a symbol in C language. Symbols in assembly language are displayed in accordance with the setting of the Debugger Option dialog box . Moves up one line. Moves down one line. Forcibly reads peripheral I/O registers that are disabled from being read because their values will be changed, or the data of the I/O ports and I/O protect area added in the Add I/O Port dialog box. Byte Half Word Word Adaptive Up Down Compulsion Read Context menu Beak when Access to this Variable Break when Write to this Variable Creates a break event that can be accessed for read/write by using the selected item. Creates a break event that can be accessed for write by using the selected item. 158 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Break when Read from this Variable Clear RRM Setting... Event? Change Watch... Delete Watch Bin Oct Dec Hex String Proper Creates a break event that can be accessed for read by using the selected item. Deletes a break event corresponding to the selected item. Sets the sampling range of the real-time RAM monitor function (RRM function). Opens the RRM dialog box (when IECUBE is connected). Displays the event information of the variable selected. If an event is set, the Event dialog box is opened. Changes the selected watch data. Opens the Change Watch dialog box. Deletes the selected watch data from the window. Displays the selected line in binary numbers. Displays the selected line in octal numbers. Displays the selected line in decimal numbers. Displays the selected line in hexadecimal numbers. Displays the selected line as a character string. Displays the selected line as the default value of each variable . Symbols are displayed in accordance with the setting of the Debugger Option dialog box (default). Displays the selected line in 8-bit units. Displays the selected line in 16-bit units. Displays the selected line in 32-bit units. Displays the selected line as the default value of each variable (default). Only this item is valid for a symbol in C language. Symbols in assembly language are displayed in accordance with the setting of the Debugger Option dialog box . Moves the selected line one line up. Moves the selected line one line down. Byte Half Word Word Adaptive Up Down Function buttons Add... Opens the Add Watch dialog box. If watch data is specified and the Delete Up Down Refresh Close User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 159 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Quick Watch dialog box This dialog box is used to temporarily display or change specified watch data. (Refer to "5. 6 Watch Function".) Figure 6-26 Quick Watch Dialog Box - Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons Opening When the Source window or Assemble window is the current window, select [View] menu -> [Quick Watch...], or click the Explanation of each area (1) Name (2) Symbol name display area (3) Data value display/setting area (4) Display radix selection area (upper left field) (5) Display size selection area (second upper left field) (6) Number 160 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (1) Name This area is used to specify the watch data to be displayed. In the default condition, the string selected in the window that called this dialog box is displayed. As necessary, the character string displayed can be changed. Up to 16 input histories can be recorded. If the contents of this area have been changed, the data specified can be displayed in the field below by clicking the This area is used to display watch data (variable names, symbol names and types, and tag names of structures or unions). (Refer to "(1) Left field (symbol name display area)" in the Watch window.) This area cannot be edited. (3) Data value display/setting area This area is used to display and change data values . (Refer to "(2) Right field (data value display/setting area)" in the Watch window.) (4) Display radix selection area (upper left field) This area is used to select the display radix. Proper Hex Dec Oct Bin String Variable : Displays the default value of each variable. Symbol : Displays data with the radix set in the Debugger Option dialog box. Displays in hexadecimal numbers. Displays in decimal numbers. Displays in octal numbers. Displays in binary numbers. Displays as a character string. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 161 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (5) Display size selection area (second upper left field) This area is used to select the display size. If the display size is fixed, such as when a variable in C or register is to be displayed, it cannot be changed. Adaptive Byte Half Word Word Variable : Displays the default value of each variable. Symbol : Displays data with the size set in the Debugger Option dialog box. Displays in 8-bit units. Displays in 16-bit units. Displays in 32-bit units. (6) Number This area is used to specify the number of data to be displayed (blank or a number of 1 to 256). If this area is blank, data is displayed as a simple variable. If a number of 1 or more is specified, data is displayed as an array variable in the Watch window. If an array variable is displayed, '+' is prefixed to the data. By double-clicking this '+', all the elements of the data are expanded and displayed in accordance with the type of the data ('-' is prefixed to the expanded data. If this '-' is double-clicked, the expanded display is canceled). If the number of data to be displayed is fixed, such as when a variable in C or register is to be displayed, the specified number of data is invalid. Function buttons View Add Close Displays the data specified in (1) Name in the field below. Adds the data specified in (1) Name to the Watch window. Closes this dialog box. Data that has not actually been written to the target memory will be canceled. 162 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Add Watch dialog box This dialog box is used to register watch data to be displayed in the Watch window. (Refer to "5. 6 Watch Function".) Multiple data with the same symbol name can be registered. Figure 6-27 Add Watch Dialog Box - Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons Opening Select [View] menu -> [Add Watch...], or click the Explanation of each area (1) Name (2) Radix (3) Size (4) Number (1) Name This area is used to specify symbol to be added to the Watch window. In the default condition, the string selected in the window that called this dialog box is displayed. As necessary, the character string displayed can be changed. This area is blank if no character string is selected. Up to 16 input histories can be recorded. The input format is as follows: User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 163 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE - Variable Name of C language Variable expression : Variable Name |Variable expression [Constant value | Variable Name] |Variable expression . Member name |Variable expression -> Member name |*Variable expression |&Variable expression - Register name - peripheral I/O registers name, peripheral I/O registers bit name - Label and address of immediate value - Register name.bit - peripheral I/O registers name. bit - Label name.bit , address of immediate value.bit - Specification of scope How a variable is handled when a scope Is specified is as follows: Elements of array Entity members of structure/union Members of structure/union indicated by pointer Value of pointer variable Address where variable is located Scope Specification prog$file#func#var prog$file#var prog$func#var prog$var file#func#var file#var func#var var Program name prog prog prog prog current current current current file file 164 Table 6-15 How a Variable Is Handled When a Scope Is Specified File name Function name func global func global func global func current Variable Name var var var var var var var var User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Table 6-14 Watch Window Input Format global global file file current current CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (2) Radix This area is used to select the display radix. (Refer to "(4) Display radix selection area (upper left field)" in the Quick Watch dialog box.) (3) Size This area is used to select the display size. (Refer to "(5) Display size selection area (second upper left field)" in the Quick Watch dialog box.) (4) Number This area is used to specify the number of data to be displayed. (Refer to "(6) Number" in the Quick Watch dialog box.) Function buttons Add OK Cancel Restore Help Adds the specified data to the Watch window. The dialog box remains open. Adds the specified data to the Watch window. Closes this dialog box. Closes this dialog box. Restores the status before this dialog box was opened. Displays this dialog box online help files. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 165 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Change Watch dialog box This window is used to change the data on a line selected in the Watch window. (Refer to "5. 6 Watch Function".) A line with an open hierarchy, such as the elements of an array, and members of structures and unions cannot be changed. When watch data is changed, the contents of the selected line are replaced with the new data. The symbol name can be changed even if it results in duplication of a name already in use with existing data. Figure 6-28 Change Watch Dialog Box - Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons Opening When the Watch window is the current window, select [View] menu -> [Change Watch...]. Explanation of each area (1) Name (2) Radix (3) Size (4) Number 166 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (1) Name This area is used to change a symbol name on a line selected in the Watch window. (Refer to "(1) Name" in the Add Watch dialog box.) (2) Radix This area is used to change the display radix on a line selected in the Watch window .(Refer to "(4) Display radix selection area (upper left field)"in the Quick Watch dialog box.) (3) Size This area is used to change the display size on a line selected in the Watch window.(Refer to "(5) Display size selection area (second upper left field)" in the Quick Watch dialog box.) (4) Number This area is used to change the number of data to be displayed on a line selected in the Watch window. (Refer to "(6) Number" in the Quick Watch dialog box.) Function buttons Add OK Cancel Restore Help Cannot be selected. Replaces the data on a line selected in the Watch window with the specified data, and then closes this dialog box. Closes this dialog box. Restores the status before this dialog box was opened. Displays this dialog box online help files. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 167 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Local Variable window This window is used to display the local variable in the current function and change the local variable values. (Refer to "5. 6 Watch Function".) It is linked with the Jump function of the Stack Trace window, and displays the local variable in the function jumped when jumping to the Source window. A number of other operations using Context menu, Function buttons, etc., can be performed in this window. Figure 6-29 Local Variable Window - Opening - Explanation of each area - Context menu - Function buttons Opening Click the Loc button, or select [Browse] menu -> [Local Variable]. Explanation of each area (1) Left field (local variable name display area) (2) Right field (local variable value display/setting area) 168 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (1) Left field (local variable name display area) This area displays local variable name. (Refer to "(1) Left field (symbol name display area)" in the Watch window.) Auto, internal Static, and Register variables can be displayed. This area cannot be edited. (2) Right field (local variable value display/setting area) This area is used to display and change local variable values. (Refer to "(2) Right field (data value display/setting area)" in the Watch window.) [View] menu (Local variable window-dedicated items) When this window is the current window, The following items are added on [View] menu. Bin Oct Dec Hex String Proper Displays binary numbers. Displays octal numbers. Displays decimal numbers. Displays octal numbers. Displays character strings. Displays the default value of each variable (default). User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 169 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Context menu Add Watch... Bin Oct Dec Hex String Proper Opens the Add Watch dialog box. Displays the selected line in binary numbers. Displays the selected line in octal numbers. Displays the selected line in decimal numbers. Displays the selected line in hexadecimal numbers. Displays the selected line as a character string. Displays the selected line as the default value of each variable . Symbols are displayed in accordance with the setting of the Debugger Option dialog box (default). Function buttons Refresh Close Updates the contents of this window with the latest watch data. Closes this window. 170 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Stack Trace window This window is used to display or change the current stack contents of the user program. (Refer to "5. 6. 7 Stack trace display function".) The window corresponding to the stack contents can be jumped to with the Jump function. A number of other operations using Context menu, Function buttons, etc., can be performed in this window. Caution1 The stack trace display function may not operate correctly if there is a function that does not create a stack frame. Caution2 [ERROR] may be displayed during prologue or epilogue processing of a function. Figure 6-30 Stack Trace Window - Opening - Explanation of each area - [View] menu (Stack Trace window-dedicated items) - Context menu - Function buttons Opening Click the Stk button, or select [Browse] menu -> [Stack Trace]. Explanation of each area (1) Left field (stack frame number display area) (2) Center field (stack frame contents display area) (3) Right field (stack contents display/setting area) User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 171 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (1) Left field (stack frame number display area) This area assigns numbers to and displays the stack contents. A stack frame number is a natural number starting from 1. The shallower the nesting of the stack, the higher the number. This means that a function having stack number one higher than that of a certain function is the function that calls the certain function. (2) Center field (stack frame contents display area) This area displays the stack frame contents. It displays function names or local variable names. Note, however, that this area cannot be edited. (a) If the stack contents consist of a function They are displayed as follows: [program name$file name#function name (argument list) #line number] If this line is double-clicked, the operation will be the same as jumping to the Source window of the Jump function (i.e., the local variable in the function to which execution has jumped will be displayed in the Local Variable window).If the function has a local variable, the local variable will be displayed on the next and subsequent lines. (b) If the stack contents consist of a local variable Note that the internal Static and Register variables are not displayed. (3) Right field (stack contents display/setting area) This area is used to display or change the stack contents. 172 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Its type and name are displayed. (Refer to "Table 6-12 Watch Window Display Format (Symbol)".) CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (a) If the stack contents are a function '--' is displayed and the function cannot be changed. (b) If the stack contents are a local variable The variable value is displayed. (Refer to "(2) Right field (data value display/setting area)" in the Watch window.) [View] menu (Stack Trace window-dedicated items) When this window is the current window, The following items are added on [View] menu. Bin Oct Dec Hex String Proper Displays binary numbers. Displays octal numbers. Displays decimal numbers. Displays octal numbers. Displays character strings. Displays the default value of each variable (default). Context menu Bin Oct Dec Hex String Proper Displays the selected line in binary numbers. Displays the selected line in octal numbers. Displays the selected line in decimal numbers. Displays the selected line in hexadecimal numbers. Displays the selected line as a character string. Displays the selected line as the default value of each variable . Symbols are displayed in accordance with the setting of the Debugger Option dialog box (default). Displays the corresponding source text and source line from the jump destination address specified by the data value at the cursor position. (Refer to "5. 14. 2 Jump function".) If no line information exists at the jump destination address, however, you cannot jump. Opens the Source window. If an active Source window is open, that window is displayed in the forefront (so that it can be manipulated). Disassembles and displays starting from the jump destination address specified by the data value at the cursor position. (Refer to "5. 14. 2 Jump function".) Opens the Assemble window. If an active Assemble window is open, that window is displayed in the forefront (so that it can be manipulated). Source Text Assemble User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 173 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Memory Displays the memory contents starting from the jump destination address specified by the data value at the cursor position. (Refer to "5. 14. 2 Jump function".) Opens the Memory window. If an active Memory window is open, that window is displayed in the forefront (so that it can be manipulated). Function buttons Refresh Shrink <<< Expand >>> (when the Updates the contents of this window with the latest watch data. Collapses the local variable list of the selected function. Displays the local variable list of the selected function. Closes this window. 174 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Memory window This window is used to display and change the memory contents. (Refer to "5. 7 Memory Manipulation Function".) The memory access status (read, write, read & write) can be displayed using different colors (refer to "5. 7. 4 Access monitor function (when IECUBE connected)"). Other operations using Context menu, Function buttons, etc., can be performed in this window. Moreover, there are two statuses, Active Status and Static Status, for this window. When the window is in the active status, it has Trace Result with Linking Window (when IECUBE connected), Jump function . (Refer to "5. 14 Functions Common to Various Windows".) Remark The display start position when the this window is opened is as follows: first time : Display starts from the first address of the RAM area. Second and subsequent times : Display starts from the address at which an active status window was closed. (if an active status window has never been closed, display starts from the first display start position). Figure 6-31 Memory Window Figure 6-32 Memory Window (When "5. 12 The real-time RAM monitor function" Selected) - Opening - Explanation of each area User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 175 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE - [View]menu (Memory window-dedicated items) - Context menu - Function buttons Opening Click the Mem button, or select [Browse] menu -> [Memory]. Explanation of each area (1) Addr (2) +0 +1 +2... ... ... (3) 0 1 2 3 ... ... ... (1) Addr This area displays memory addresses. (2) +0 +1 +2... ... ... This area is used to display and change memory contents, and to display the access status (refer to "5. 7. 4 Access monitor function (when IECUBE connected)"). Black Green Red Blue No access Read Write Read & write Values are changed through direct input.The location to be changed is displayed in red and the contents of the contents of the change are written into the target memory when the Enter key is pressed. The previous value can be canceled by the ESC key. Up to 256 bytes can be specified at one time. 176 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (3) 0 1 2 3 ... ... ... This area is used to display and change the memory contents in ASCII characters. This area is displayed when [View] menu -> [Ascii] is selected. Data can be changed in this area in the same manner as in the memory display area. The changing method is the same as in (2) +0 +1 +2... ... .... [View]menu (Memory window-dedicated items) The following items are added in the [View] menu , when the Memory Window is active. Bin Oct Dec Hex Nibble Byte Half Word Word Ascii Displays binary numbers. Displays octal numbers. Displays decimal numbers. Displays hexadecimal numbers (default). Displays in 4-bit units. Displays in 8-bit units (default). Displays in 16-bit units. Displays in 32-bit units. Selects whether ASCII characters are displayed or not. Checked: Displayed Not checked: No display (default) Displays in little endian (default). Displays in big endian. This area is used to set about Access monitor function (when IECUBE connected). Clears the display color through the access monitor function (when IECUBE connected). Enables/disables cumulative display of access status (memory content change) (when IECUBE is connected). Checked : Cumulative display of memory contents changes Not checked : Display of only memory contents changes from previous update Little Endian Big Endian Access Monitoring Clear Accumulative Context menu Move... RRM Setting... Moves the display position. Opens the Address move dialog box. Opens the RRM dialog box. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 177 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Bin Oct Dec Hex Nibble Byte Half Word Word Ascii Displays binary numbers. Displays octal numbers. Displays decimal numbers. Displays hexadecimal numbers (default). Displays in 4-bit units. Displays in 8-bit units (default). Displays in 16-bit units. Displays in 32-bit units. Selects whether ASCII characters are displayed or not. Checked: Displayed Not checked: No display (default) Clears the display color through the access monitor function (when IECUBE connected). Enables/disables cumulative display of access status (memory content change) (when IECUBE is connected). Enables/disables cumulative display of access status (memory content change). Checked : Cumulative display of memory contents changes Not checked : Display of only memory contents changes from previous update Clear Access Monitor Accumulative Function buttons Search... Opens the Memory Search dialog box and searches for character strings from the displayed memory contents, or memory contents. Selected data (a memory value) is displayed in the Memory Search dialog box as data to be searched.If the Memory Search dialog box is opened without data specified, specify data from the keyboard. The result of the search is highlighted in the Memory window. Searches the memory contents satisfying the search condition set in the Memory Search dialog box, forward (upward on screen) from the address at the cursor position. This button is displayed as the << >> Stop (during search) Refresh Modify... Close 178 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Memory Search dialog box This dialog box is used to search the memory contents of the part of the Memory window at which the cursor is located. (Refer to "5. 7 Memory Manipulation Function".) If the cursor is placed in (2) +0 +1 +2... ... ... in the Memory window, the specified data is treated as a binary data string, and if the cursor is placed in (3) 0 1 2 3 ... ... ..., the specified data is treated as an ASCI character string, and the contents of these respective areas are searched. By setting each item and then clicking the - Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons Opening When the Memory window is the current window, select [View] menu -> [Search...], or click the Explanation of each area (1) Find What (2) Unit (3) Scan Whole Region (4) Direction (5) Address User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 179 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (1) Find What This area is used to specify the data to be searched. In the default condition, the string selected in the window that called this dialog box is displayed. As necessary, the character string displayed can be changed. Up to 16 input histories can be recorded. (a) When searching (2) +0 +1 +2... ... ... Up to 16 data items can be specified. Delimit each data with a "blank character". (b) When searching (3) 0 1 2 3 ... ... ... Up to 256 characters can be specified. A "blank character" in the data is treated as a blank character. (2) Unit This area is used to specify the number of bits of the data to be searched in (2) +0 +1 +2... ... .... Byte Half Word Word Searches the data as 8-bit data (default). Searches the data as 16-bit data. Searches the data as 32-bit data. (3) Scan Whole Region This should be checked to search the entire specified range. (4) Direction This area is used to specify the direction of the search. Up Down Forward search. Searches data forward (upward on screen) from the current position of the cursor. Backward search. Searches data backward (downward on screen) from the current position of the cursor (default). (5) Address This area is used to specify the address to be searched. The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal. An address can be also specified by a symbol or 180 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Find Next Searches the specified data in accordance with a given condition. If the specified character string is found as a result of a search, it is highlighted. To continue searching, click this button again. Sets the specified condition as the search condition and closes this dialog box. Stops searching. Closes this dialog box. (During searching, this button is replaced by the Set Find Stop(during searching) Cancel Help expression. (Refer to "Table 5-6 Specifying Symbols".) User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 181 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Memory Fill dialog box This dialog box is used to fill the memory contents in the Memory window with specified codes (fill code). (Refer to "5. 7 Memory Manipulation Function".) Figure 6-34 Memory Fill Dialog Box - Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons Opening Select [Edit] menu -> [Memory] -> [Fill...]. Explanation of each area (1) Address (2) fill code (1) Address This area is used to specify the memory address range whose contents are filled. The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal. An address can be also specified by a symbol or (2) fill code This area is used to specify the data (fill code) used when filling the range specified in (1) Address. Up to 16 binary data strings (byte data strings) can be specified. Delimit each data with a "blank character". 182 expression. (Refer to "Table 5-6 Specifying Symbols".) User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons OK Stop(during filling) Cancel Restore Help Fills the specified data in accordance with a given condition. Stops filling. Closes this dialog box. (During filling, this button is replaced by the User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 183 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Memory Copy dialog box This dialog box is used to copy the memory contents in the Memory window . (Refer to "5. 7 Memory Manipulation Function".) Figure 6-35 Memory Copy Dialog Box - Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons Opening Select [Edit] menu -> [Memory] -> [Copy...]. Explanation of each area (1) Address This area is used to specify the copy source and copy destination addresses. The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal. An address can be also specified by a symbol or (a) From: Specify the address range (start address -- end address) of the copy source. (b) To: Specify start address of the copy destination. 184 expression. (Refer to "Table 5-6 Specifying Symbols".) User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons OK Stop(during copying) Cancel Restore Help Copies the memory contents in accordance with a given condition. Stops copying. Closes this dialog box. (During copying, this button is replaced by the User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 185 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Memory Compare dialog box This dialog box is used to compare the memory contents in the Memory window .(Refer to "5. 7 Memory Manipulation Function".) Figure 6-36 Memory Compare Dialog Box - Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons Opening Select [Edit] menu -> [Memory] -> [Compare...]. Explanation of each area (1) Address This area is used to specify the comparison source address and comparison destination address. The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal. An address can be also specified by a symbol or (a) Mem1 Specify the address range (start address -- end address) of the comparison source. (b) Mem2 Specify the start address of the comparison destination. 186 expression. (Refer to "Table 5-6 Specifying Symbols".) User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons OK Compares the memory contents in accordance with a given condition. If no difference is found as a result of comparison, " Wf200: No difference encountered." is displayed. If a difference is found, the Memory Compare Result dialog box is opened. Stops memory comparison. Closes this dialog box. (During comparison, this button is replaced by the Stop(during comparison) Cancel Restore Help User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 187 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Memory Compare Result dialog box This dialog box is displayed if any difference is found in the memory contents when the memory has been compared in the Memory Compare dialog box .(Refer to "5. 7 Memory Manipulation Function".) Figure 6-37 Memory Compare Result Dialog Box - Explanation of each area - Function buttons Explanation of each area (1) (comparison result display area) This area displays the results of comparing the memory. Only differences that have been found as a result of comparison are displayed. (a) Mem1 Addr Displays a comparison source address in which a difference has been found. (b) Memory Displays the data in which a difference has been found (Left: Comparison source data,Right: Comparison destination data ). (c) Mem2 Addr Displays the comparison destination address at which a difference has been found. 188 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Close Help Closes this dialog box. Displays this dialog box online help files. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 189 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE DMM dialog box This dialog box is used to set addresses and data for DMM (Dynamic Memory Modification). (Refer to "5. 7. 3 Modifying memory contents (DMM function)".) Figure 6-38 DMM Dialog Box - Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons Opening Select [Edit] menu -> [Memory] -> [Modify...], or click the Explanation of each area (1) Address (2) Data (3) Data Size (1) Address This area is used to specify the address to which data is to be written. The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal. An address can be also specified by a symbol or 190 expression. (Refer to "Table 5-6 Specifying Symbols".) User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (2) Data This area is used to specify the data to be written to the memory address specified in (1) Address. The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal. One binary data string can be specified at one time. Specify the data size in (3) Data Size. (3) Data Size This area is used to specify the size of the data specified in (2) Data to be written. Byte Half Word Word Writes data as 8-bit data. Writes data as 16-bit data. Writes data as 32-bit data. Function buttons OK Cancel Restore Help Writes the data in accordance with a given condition. Closes this dialog box. Restores the status before this dialog box was opened. Displays this dialog box online help files. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 191 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Register window This window is used to display and change registers (program registers, system registers) (refer to "5. 8 Register Manipulation Function"). Other operations using Context menu, Function buttons, etc., can be performed in this window. Each area in this window are the jump pointer of the Jump function. Figure 6-39 Register Window - Opening - Explanation of each area - [View]menu (Register window-dedicated items) - Context menu - Function buttons Opening Click the Reg button, or select [Browse] menu -> [Register]. Explanation of each area (1) Upper field (program register display area) (2) Lower field (system register display area) (1) Upper field (program register display area) 192 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE program registers. Register values are changed through direct input. The location to be changed is displayed in red and the contents of the contents of the change are written into the target memory when the Enter key is pressed. The previous value can be canceled by the ESC key. Caution When overflow of a register occurs due to an illegal value entered by the user, the register will be updated with a value of 0xFFFFFFFF. (2) Lower field (system register display area) system registers. By double-clicking "+", flag name and flag value are displayed (first character changes from "+" to "-").Expanded display is canceled by double-clicking "-" (first character changes from "-" to "+"). Register values are changed through direct input. The location to be changed is displayed in red and the contents of the contents of the change are written into the target memory when the Enter key is pressed. The previous value can be canceled by the ESC key. Caution When overflow of a register occurs due to an illegal value entered by the user, the register will be updated with a value of 0xFFFFFFFF. [View]menu (Register window-dedicated items) The following items are added in the [View] menu , when the Register window is active. Bin Oct Dec Hex Pick Up Select... Displays binary numbers. Displays octal numbers. Displays decimal numbers. Displays hexadecimal numbers (default). Displays only the registers selected in the Register Select dialog box. Opens the Register Select dialog box. Context menu Add Watch... Bin Oct Dec Registers a selected character string to the Watch window. Opens the Add Watch dialog box. Displays the selected line in binary numbers. Displays the selected line in octal numbers. Displays the selected line in decimal numbers. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 193 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Hex Pick Up Select... Displays the selected line in hexadecimal numbers (default). Displays only the registers selected in the Register Select dialog box. Selects the register to be displayed Opens the Register Select dialog box. Function buttons Refresh Close Updates the contents of the window with the latest data. Closes this window. 194 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Register Select dialog box This dialog box is used to select registers that are not displayed in the Register window .(Refer to "5. 8 Register Manipulation Function".) Figure 6-40 Register Select Dialog Box - Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons Opening When the Register window is the current window, select [View] menu -> [Select...]. Explanation of each area (1) Display, No Display This area is used to select registers that are displayed in the Register window, and those that are not. (a) Display Registers displayed in the Register window. (b) No Display Registers not displayed in the Register window. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 195 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (c) Button The following buttons are used to change register to be displayed in the Register window. << Show Hide >> << Show All Hide All >> Moves the register selected from the (b) No Display list to (a) Display. Moves the register selected from the (a) Display list to (b) No Display. Moves all registers to (a) Display. Moves all registers to (b) No Display. Two or more registers can be selected by clicking any of the above buttons while holding down the Ctrl or Shift key. Function buttons OK Cancel Restore Help Reflects the selection in this dialog box in the Register window and closes this dialog box. Cancels the changes and closes this dialog box. Restores the status before this dialog box was opened. Displays this dialog box online help files. 196 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE IOR window This window is used to display and change the contents of peripheral I/O registers and the I/O ports that have been registered in the Add I/O Port dialog box .(Refer to "5. 8 Register Manipulation Function".) A number of other operations using Context menu, Function buttons, etc., can be performed in this window. Caution1 However, that the values of read-only peripheral I/O registers and I/O ports cannot be changed. In addition, the peripheral I/O registers and I/O ports that cause the device to operate when they are read are read-protected and therefore cannot be read. To read these registers, select a register, and select and execute [Compulsion Read] from the context menu. Caution2 During user program execution, the IOR contents are updated at every sampling time set in the Extended Option dialog box (refer to "5. 12 The real-time RAM monitor function"). However, updating is not performed when the RAM monitor function is OFF. Remark1 The display start position when the window is opened is as follows. First time: Display from peripheral I/O registers of minimum address Second and subsequent times: Display from first peripheral I/O registers when window was last closed Remark2 If the device supports programmable I/O registers and a programmable I/O area has been set in the Configuration dialog box, the programmable I/O registers and expansion peripheral I/O registers are also displayed. If the value of an I/O port address is defined, the I/O port name is displayed in light color. Figure 6-41 IOR Window - Opening - Explanation of each area - Context menu - Function buttons User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 197 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Opening Click the IOR button, or select [Browse] menu -> [IOR]. Explanation of each area (1) Name (2) Attribute (3) Value (1) Name This area displays the names of peripheral I/O registers and I/O ports. If the value of an I/O port address is not defined, the I/O port name displayed in light color. (2) Attribute This area displays the attributes of peripheral I/O registers and I/O ports. This area displays the read/write attributes, access types, and displays and absolute addresses from the left side. When the bit peripheral I/O registers is displayed, bit-offset value is also displayed. It can be specified whether this area is displayed or not, by selecting [View] menu -> [Attribute]. Read/Write Attribute R W R/W * Read only Write only Read/write Register that is read via an emulation register to prevent the device from operating when this register is read. To read this attribute directly from a peripheral I/O registers, execute [View] menu -> [Compulsion Read]. Even a write-only peripheral I/O registers can also be read via an emulation register. However, some devices do not support this function. Access Type 1 8 16 32 Can be accessed in Bit units. Can be accessed in Byte units. Can be accessed in Half Word units. Can be accessed in Word units. 198 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (3) Value This area is used to display and change the contents of a peripheral I/O registers and I/O port. The contents are displayed differently as follows, depending on the attribute: Black Display -** Read only or read/write Write only Value changes if read Values are changed through direct input. The location to be changed is displayed in red and the contents of the contents of the change are written into the target memory when the Enter key is pressed. The previous value can be canceled by the ESC key. Note that the values of read-only peripheral I/O registers and I/O ports cannot be changed. The value of read-protected peripheral I/O registers and I/O ports can be read by selecting Context menu -> [Compulsion Read]. [View] menu (IOR window-dedicated items) When this window is the current window, The following items are added on [View] menu. Bin Oct Dec Hex Sort By Name Sort By Address Unsort Attribute Pick Up Select... Compulsion Read Displays binary numbers. Displays octal numbers. Displays decimal numbers. Displays octal numbers(default). Displays in alphabetical order. Displays in address order (default). Does not sort. Switches on/off display of the (2) Attribute. Displays only the registers selected in the IOR Select dialog box. Opens the IOR Select dialog box. Forcibly reads the peripheral I/O registers that are disabled from being read because their values will be changed, or the data of the I/O ports and I/O protect area added in the Add I/O Port dialog box. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 199 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Context menu Move... Add Watch... Add I/O Port... Bin Oct Dec Hex Sort By Name Sort By Address Unsort Attribute Pick Up Select... Compulsion Read Opens the Address move dialog box. Opens the Add Watch dialog box. Opens the Add I/O Port dialog box. Displays binary numbers. Displays octal numbers. Displays decimal numbers. Displays octal numbers(default). Displays in alphabetical order. Displays in address order (default). Does not sort. Switches on/off display of (2) Attribute. Displays only the registers selected in the IOR Select dialog box. Opens the IOR Select dialog box. Forcibly reads the peripheral I/O registers that are disabled from being read because their values will be changed, or the data of the I/O ports and I/O protect area added in the Add I/O Port dialog box. Function buttons Refresh Close Updates the contents of this window with the latest watch data. Closes this window. 200 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE IOR Select dialog box This dialog box is used to select peripheral I/O registers and I/O ports that are not displayed the IOR window. (Refer to "5. 8 Register Manipulation Function".) It is also used to specify the sequence in which registers and ports are displayed. Figure 6-42 IOR Select Dialog Box - Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons Opening When the IOR window is the current window, select [View] menu -> [Select...]. Explanation of each area (1) Display, Pick Up, No Display (2) Arrange (3) Sort by User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 201 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (1) Display, Pick Up, No Display This area is used to select peripheral I/O registers / I/O ports that are displayed in the IOR window, and those that are not. (a) Display The peripheral I/O registers / I/O ports displayed in the IOR window. (b) No Display The peripheral I/O registers / I/O ports not displayed in the IOR window. (c) Pick Up The following buttons are used to change peripheral I/O registers/ I/O ports to be displayed in the IOR window. << Show Hide >> << Show All Hide All >> Moves peripheral I/O registers / I/O ports selected from the (b) No Display list to (a) Display. Moves peripheral I/O registers / I/O ports selected from the (a) Display list to (b) No Display. Moves all peripheral I/O registers / I/O ports to (a) Display. Moves all peripheral I/O registers / I/O ports to (b) No Display. Two or more registers can be selected by clicking any of the above buttons while holding down the Ctrl or Shift key. (2) Arrange The following buttons are used to change the display sequence in the (a) Display. Top Up Moves the selected peripheral I/O registers or I/O port to the top of the list. Moves the selected peripheral I/O registers or I/O port one line up. 202 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Down Bottom (3) Sort by Moves the selected peripheral I/O registers or I/O port one line down. Moves the selected peripheral I/O registers or I/O port to the bottom of the list. The following buttons are used to change the display sequence in the (b) No Display. Name Address Displays in alphabetical order. Displays in address order. Function buttons OK Cancel Restore Help Reflects the selection in this dialog box in the IOR window and closes this dialog box. Cancels the changes and closes this dialog box. Restores the status before this dialog box was opened. Displays this dialog box online help files. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 203 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Add I/O Port dialog box This dialog box is used to register an I/O port to be added to the IOR window. (Refer to "5. 8 Register Manipulation Function".) Figure 6-43 Add I/O Port Dialog Box - Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons Opening Select [Option] menu ->[Add I/O Port...]. Explanation of each area (1) I/O Port List (2) Name (3) Address (4) Access (5) Read/Write 204 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (1) I/O Port List This area lists the I/O ports currently registered. If a new I/O port is registered, it is added to this list. An I/O port already registered can be selected and changed or deleted by Function buttons. (2) Name This area is used to specify an I/O port name to be added (up to 15 characters long). (3) Address This area is used to specify the address of the I/O port to be added. The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal. An address can be also specified by a symbol. Area can be specified (4) Access This area is used to select the access size of the I/O port to be added. Byte Half Word Word 8-bit unit (default) 16-bit unit 32-bit unit (5) Read/Write This area is used to specify the access attribute of the I/O port to be added. In the default condition, all the attributes are not checked (i.e., the I/O port can be both read and written). (Refer to "Table 5-6 Specifying Symbols".) Target area , peripheral I/O registers area User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 205 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons OK Cancel Restore Help Add Change Delete Reflects the result of addition in the IOR window and closes this dialog box. Cancels the changing , closes this dialog box. Restores the original status. Displays this dialog box online help files. Adds an I/O port of the specified address. Changes the setting of the I/O port selected in the (1) I/O Port List. Deletes the I/O port selected in the (1) I/O Port List. 206 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Timer dialog box IECUBE This dialog box is used to register and set timer event conditions, and display execution time measurement results. (Refer to "5. 11 Event function", "5. 9 Timer Function".) The execution time display area can be constantly displayed as the Timer Result dialog box by clicking the - Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons (Related event function) Opening Click the Tim button, or select [Event] menu -> [Timer...]. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 207 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of each area (1) Timer Name (2) Start Event, End Event (3) Time (4) Execution time display area (5) Time Out Break (6) Event Manager (1) Timer Name This area is used to set a timer event name. Directly input an alphanumeric string of up to eight characters as a name. To display the contents of an already created event condition, select from the drop-down list. To display from user program execution until break, specify "Run-Break" (refer to "5. 9. 2 Run-Break event"). gray mark indicates that an event condition is being edited and has not been registered yet. By clicking the left mark, an event condition can be validated or invalidated. (2) Start Event, End Event This area is used to set an event condition for the timer. The number of event conditions that can be registered in this area is one for each of the start and end conditions. Setting of event conditions is easily done by dragging the icon of the event to be set from the event manager area and dropping it in this area. For details, refer to "5. 11. 3 Setting event conditions". (3) Time This area is used to select the unit in which the timer measurement result is to be displayed. nsec usec msec sec min Nanoseconds (default) Microseconds Milliseconds Seconds Minutes 208 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM The mark on the left of this area indicates the utilization status of events (refer to "Table 5-16 Event icon"). The CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (4) Execution time display area Values"). Caution Pass Total Average Max Min Measurement results that cannot be trusted due to counter overflow are displayed in red. Number of passes Total execution time in the measurement zone specified by start event and end event conditions Average execution time Maximum execution time Minimum execution time Connected IE IECUBE Measurable Execution Time Approx. 2.8 minutes max. (External clock = 50 MHz, 1 division, resolution = 20 ns) Approx. 195.2 hours max. (External clock = 50 MHz, 4K division, resolution = 81920 ns) Note: The measurable execution time differs according to "Table 610 Relationship Between Division Ratio and Maximum Measurement Time (Timer Count (Timer))". Approx. 3 minutes and 30 seconds max. (Resolution = 100 ns) Note N-Wire CARD Note Only during display to the status bar in the Main window (a) Function buttons Initialize Copy View Always Clears the measurement results. Copies the measurement result to the clipboard in text format. Opens the Timer Result dialog box. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Table 6-16 Measurable Values Measurable Execution Count 65535 times max. (16 bit) - This area displays the result of measuring the execution time of the program (refer to "Table 6-16 Measurable 209 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (5) Time Out Break This area is used to set the operation and its duration when the measurement time in the block specified in the (2) Start Event, End Event (time from occurrence of start event until occurrence of end event) measurement time, exceed the specified time (timeout time). (a) Time Out Break settings Settings related to timeout breaks. ON OFF Overflow If the timeout time specified in (b) Timeout time setting is exceeded, a timeout break occurs. No timeout break occurs (default). (b) Timeout time setting Timeout time setting can be done through direct input. This setting is invalid when "OFF" or "Overflow" was selected in (a) Time Out Break settings . (6) Event Manager tion in event manager area".) Function Buttons Refer to " Function buttons (Related event function)" in the Event Manager. 210 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM This area is used to display the list of the events registered. (Refer to "Table 5-16 Input up to the measurable maximum time (refer to "Table 6-16 Measurable Values") is possible. Event icon", "(4) Manipula- A timeout break occurs at the largest measurable time (refer to "Table 6-16 Measurable Values"). CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Timer Result dialog box IECUBE This dialog box displays the result of measuring the execution time (Refer to "5. 9 Timer Function".) By clicking the - Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons Opening Select a timer event condition in the Timer dialog box , click the Explanation of each area (1) Execution time display area Same area is Timer dialog box. Refer to "(4) Execution time display area" . Function buttons Initialize Copy Close Help Clears the measurement results. Copies the measurement result to the clipboard in text format. Closes this dialog box. Displays this dialog box online help files. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 211 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Trace window IECUBE This window used to display the trace results. (Refer to "5. 10 Trace Function (When IECUBE Connected)".) Display updates are performed during breaks or during step execution. This window has Mixed display mode (Trace window). Also, It has "5. 14. 3 Trace Result with Linking Window (when IECUBE connected)". A number of other operations using Context menu, Function buttons, etc., can be performed in this window. Figure 6-46 Trace Window - Opening - Explanation of each area - [View]menu (Trace window-dedicated items) - Context menu - Function buttons Opening Click the TrW button, or select [Browse] menu -> [Trace]. 212 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of each area (1) Point mark display area (2) Trace mode display area (3) Trace result display area (1) Point mark display area This area displays the Event Setting Status (Event Mark). If an execution event or access event is set at the corresponding trace address, the mark corresponding to the type of the event is displayed. The mark displayed is not that during trace but an event mark that is set when the trace result is displayed. (2) Trace mode display area This area displays the type of trace mode. A T M N a start or an end frame (section trace or qualify trace) Delay trigger frame DMA point access frame (DMA start point and end point) Frame for which not all the trace data was fetched (3) Trace result display area (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) This area displays the trace results. Complement frames are displayed in gray. In the case of complement frames, only (a) Frame , (c) Address Data Status (fetch access display) , and (e) DisAsm are displayed. Whether each of the following sub-areas is displayed or not can be selected in the Trace Data Select dialog box. (a) Frame This area displays the trace flame number. (b) Time This area displays the number of clocks required for the target chip from the execution start of the program to the execution start of an instruction of each frame or generation of memory access cause. Complement frames are not displayed. The display contents can be switched between clock count display and time display in the Trace Data Select User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 213 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE dialog box. For the relationship between the timer count division ratio and maximum measurement time, refer to "Table 6- Caution (c) This area displays the result of fetching the program. In the case of a complement frame, only (ii) Address Data is displayed. (i) Status The following types of statuses are available: BRM1 Fetching of first byte of first instruction after branch If the fetch address is the start of the symbol, the first line is highlighted in blue. (The frame which is BRM1 and is also M1 is included.) Fetching of first byte of instruction Any of the following - 6th byte and 8th byte fetch of the instruction - Data access frame (3 frames max., 2 frames when RRM function is selected) - Frame of the second instruction (when two instructions are executed at the same time) - Invalid flame When a 6-byte or 8-byte instruction code is displayed, the first 4 bytes are displayed in the first frame, and the other bytes are displayed in the second and third frames. If two instructions are executed at the same time, one frame is displayed on two lines. The instruction code at the lower address is displayed on the first line and the instruction code at the higher address is displayed on the second line. (ii) Address Data M1 Blank Remark This area displays the address and data. Address Data (d) Displays the fetch address Displays the fetch data This area displays the result of accessing data. Complement frames are not displayed. Status R W (e) DisAsm This area displays the result of disassembly (only when the (i) Status is BRM1 or M1). To display instruction codes when two instructions are simultaneously executed, one instruction is displayed Data read Data write 214 8 Relationship Between Division Ratio and Maximum Measurement Time (Time Tag Counter (Trace))"). If overflow occurs, the time tag maximum value is displayed in red. Address Data Status (fetch access display) Address Data Status (data access display) User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE on the first line, and the other instruction is displayed on the second line. [View]menu (Trace window-dedicated items) The following items are added in the [View] menu , when the Trace window is active. Select... Mix Selects the contents to be displayed. Opens the Trace Data Select dialog box. Specifies whether the source file are displayed in mixed display mode, or not displayed. Checked: Mixed display Not checked: No display (default) Links the Trace window with the following windows: (Refer to "5. 14. 3 Trace Result with Linking Window (when IECUBE connected)".) A checked window is linked. Links the Source window. Links the Assemble window. Links the Memory window. Window Synchronize Source Text Assemble Memory Context menu Move... Trace Clear Select... Mix Moves the display position. Opens the Trace move dialog box. Clears the trace data. Selects the contents to be displayed. Opens the Trace Data Select dialog box. Specifies whether the source file are displayed in mixed display mode, or not displayed. Checked: Mixed display Not checked: No display (default) Links the Trace window with the following windows: (Refer to "5. 14. 3 Trace Result with Linking Window (when IECUBE connected)".) Links the Source window. Links the Assemble window. Links the Memory window. Displays the corresponding source text and source line, using the data value at the cursor position as the jump destination address (refer to "5. 14. 2 Jump function"). If no line information exists at the jump destination address, however, you cannot jump. Opens the Source window. If an active Source window window is open, that window is displayed in the forefront (so that it can be manipulated). Disassembles and displays starting from the jump destination address specified by the data value at the cursor position (refer to "5. 14. 2 Jump function"). Opens the Assemble window. If an active Assemble window is open, that window is displayed in the forefront (so that it can be manipulated). Window Synchronize Source Text Assemble Memory Source Text Assemble User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 215 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Memory Displays the memory contents starting from the jump destination address specified by the data value at the cursor position (refer to "5. 14. 2 Jump function"). Opens the Memory window. If an active Memory window is open, that window is displayed in the forefront (so that it can be manipulated). Function buttons Search... Opens the Trace Search dialog box and searches trace results. The searched result will be highlighted in the Trace window. Same function as [View] menu -> [Search...]. Searches forward (upward on screen) for a trace result that satisfies the search condition set in the Trace Search dialog box. Searches backward (downward on screen) for a trace result that satisfies the search condition set in the Trace Search dialog box. Updates the contents of the window with the latest data. Closes this window. << >> Refresh Close 216 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Trace Search dialog box IECUBE This dialog box is used to search in the Trace window. (Refer to "5. 10 Trace Function (When IECUBE Connected)".) By setting each item and then clicking the - Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons Opening When the Trace window is the current window, select [View] menu -> [Search...], or click the Explanation of each area (1) Event Status (2) Access Size (3) Address, Mask (4) Data, Mask (5) Scan Whole Region (6) Direction (7) Frame User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 217 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (1) Event Status This area is used to select a status condition. If a status condition is omitted, all frames (All status) are searched. All status M1 Fetch R/W Read Write (2) Access Size All frames (default) M1 fetch (including BRM1) Data read/write (including R, W) Data read Data write This area is used to select an access size condition. By specifying an access size condition, the access width of a data condition to be detected by an access event is determined. Byte Half Word Word No Condition Bit Searches for a data condition with 8-bit width (only during 8-bit access). Searches for a data condition with 16-bit width (only during 16-bit access). Searches for a data condition with 32-bit width (only during 32-bit access). Does not search based on access size (nothing can be input to the Data area). Searches for a data condition with 1-bit width (only during 8-bit access). In this case, a data condition is searched with 1-bit width. Because of the operation of the in-circuit emulator, access to a bit is not directly traced; the ID850QB searches a dummy bit access by internally setting address conditions and data conditions as follows: Input example: Address: FE20.1 Data: 1 | Setting of trace search Address: FE20 Data: 00000010B Mask: 11111101B If another bit of the same address is accessed or if all the 8 bits of the same address are accessed, therefore, a trace data is searched in accordance with the specified status if the address and bit match the specified value of [address.bit]. CautionIf an access event is specified as a status condition, the alternative of Bit is not displayed. If Bit or 1 is specified, an error occurs. If no access size condition is specified, a judgment is automatically made from the address condition and data condition, and the following is set: 218 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE - Bit if the address condition is set in bit units - Byte if the data condition is set in 8-bit units - Half Word if the data condition is set in 16-bit units - Word if the address condition is set in 32-bit units - No Condition if no data condition is specified (3) Address, Mask This area is used to specify an address condition. The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal. A symbol can be also specified by a symbol or The following can be set: Settable range 0 <= address value <= 0xFFFFFFFF 0 <= mask value <= 0xFFFFFFFF (a) Address None None Set an address condition (lower address - higher address) (may be omitted). The following can be set: (i) Setting as a point Set a value to only the lower address, or set the same value to the lower address and the higher address. (ii) Setting as a range Set a value to the lower address and the higher address. Mask cannot be set. (iii) Setting as a bit Set a value to only the lower address, or set the same value to the lower address and the higher address. Specify a value in the form of address.bit. Mask cannot be set. The value of bit, which indicates the bit position, must be 0 <= bit<= 7. (b) Mask Set a mask value for an address value (only when (i) Setting as a point). Mask may be omitted. The address value of a bit whose mask value is 1 may be 0 or 1. Example 1: Address Mask 0x4000 to 0x4000 0xFF With this setting, addresses 0x4000 to 0x40FF satisfy the condition. expression ("Table 5-6 Specifying Symbols"). Table 6-17 Settable Range of Address Condition (Trace) Condition User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 219 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Example 2: Address Mask 0x4000 to 0x4000 0x101 With this setting, addresses 0x4000, 0x4001, 0x4100, and 0x4101 satisfy the condition. (4) Data, Mask This area is used to set data conditions. The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal. The settable range differs as follows depending on the access size condition specified in the (2) Access Size. (a) Data Symbols"). (b) Mask Set a mask value for the data value. When a mask is set, the data value for the bit whose mask value is 1 may be 0 or 1. Example 1: Data Mask 0x4000 0xFF With this setting, addresses 0x4000 to 0x40FF satisfy the condition. Example 2: Data Mask 0x4000 0x101 With this setting, addresses 0x4000, 0x4001, 0x4100, and 0x4101 satisfy the condition. (5) Scan Whole Region This should be checked to search the entire specified range. 220 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Set a data value as data conditions. A data can be also specified by a symbol (refer to "Table 5-6 (Refer to "Table 6-23 Settable Range of Data Condition".) Specifying CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (6) Direction This area is used to specify the direction of the search. Up Down Forward search. Searches data forward (upward on screen) from the current position of the cursor. Backward search (default). Searches data backward (downward on screen) from the current position of the cursor. (7) Frame This area is used to specify a frame number to be searched. The default radix for inputting a numeric value is decimal. A symbol can be also specified by Frame Number Specification Format. Function buttons Find Next Searches the specified data in accordance with a given condition. If the specified frame is found as a result of a search, it is highlighted. To continue searching, click this button again. Sets the specified condition as the search condition and closes this dialog box. Closes this dialog box. Displays this dialog box online help files. Set Find Cancel Help User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 221 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Trace Data Select dialog box IECUBE This dialog box is used to select items to be displayed in the Trace window. (Refer to "5. 10 Trace Function (When IECUBE Connected)".) Figure 6-48 Trace Data Select Dialog Box - Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons Opening When the Trace window is the current window, select [View] menu -> [Select...]. Explanation of each area (1) Item (2) Radix (1) Item 222 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE This area is used to select items to be displayed in the Trace window. may not be selected. The field checked is displayed. Frame Timetag Instruction Fetch Address Instruction Fetch Data Instruction Fetch Status Memory Access Address Memory Access Data Memory Access Status DisAssemble (2) Radix (a) Frame field Displaying the following items may or (b) Time field Whether the clock or time is displayed can be selected. Address field in (c) Address Data Status (fetch access display) Data field in (c) Address Data Status (fetch access display) Status field in (c) Address Data Status (fetch access display) Address field in (d) Address Data Status (data access display) Data field in (d) Address Data Status (data access display) Status field in (d) Address Data Status (data access display) (e) DisAsm field This area is used to select the radix in which data is to be displayed. Displaying the following items may or may not be selected. Instruction Fetch Data Memory Access Data Data field in (c) Address Data Status (fetch access display) Data field in (d) Address Data Status (data access display) HEX DEC OCT Bin Displays hexadecimal numbers. (default) Displays decimal numbers. Displays octal numbers. Displays binary numbers. Function buttons OK Cancel Restore Help Reflects the results of selection in this dialog box in the Trace window. Closes this dialog box. Restores the original status. Displays this dialog box online help files. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 223 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Trace move dialog box IECUBE This dialog box is used to specify the position from which displaying the Trace window is started. (Refer to "5. 10 Trace Function (When IECUBE Connected)".) Figure 6-49 Trace Move Dialog Box - Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons Opening When the Trace window is the current window, select [View] menu -> [Move...]. Explanation of each area (1) Frame selection area This area is used to specify the frame at the destination. 1st frame of last block Moves the display start position to the first frame in the newest block frame of trace data. The display start position is moved to the first frame of the trace data when using an in-circuit emulator without a block frame. Moves the display start position to the trigger frame in the newest block frame of trace data. Moves the display start position to the last frame of trace data. Trigger frame of last block Last frame of last block 224 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Frame No. Moves the display start position to the specified frame number. In the default condition, the character string selected in the window that called this dialog box or "Last" is selected. The default radix for inputting a numeric value is decimal. If 0 is specified, the display start position is moved to the first frame of trace data. In addition, frame number can also be specified in the following format. Up to 16 input histories can be recorded. Specification +numeric value -numeric value Top First Trigger Last Bottom Abbrevia tion None None O S T L B Moves backward (downward on screen) the display start position from the frame at the cursor by the specified number of frames (numeric value). Moves forward (upward on screen) the display start position from the frame at the cursor by the specified number of frames (numeric value). Moves the display start position to the first frame Same as [1st frame of last block] Same as [Trigger frame of last block] Same as [Last frame of last block] Moves the display start position to the last frame Function buttons OK Cancel Restore Help Starts trace display from the specified position. Closes this dialog box. Restores the input data to the original status. Displays this dialog box online help files. Table 6-18 Frame Number Specification Format Contents User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 225 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Trace dialog box IECUBE This dialog box is used to register, set, and display trace event conditions. (Refer to "5. 11 Event function", "5. 10 Trace Function (When IECUBE Connected)".) The trace event conditions for when performing conditional trace are specified in this dialog box (refer to "Table Registration and setting of trace event conditions is done by setting each item (256 items max.) in this dialog box and then pressing the - Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons (Related event function) Opening Click the Trc button, or select [Event] menu -> [Trace...]. Explanation of each area 226 (2) (1) Trace Name Delay Trigger User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 5-13 Types of Conditional Trace" ). CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (1) Trace Name This area is used to set a trace event name. Directly input an alphanumeric string of up to eight characters as a name. To display the contents of an already created event condition, select from the drop-down list. gray mark indicates that an event condition is being edited and has not been registered yet. By clicking the left mark, an event condition can be validated or invalidated. (2) Delay Trigger This area is used to set an event condition for a delay trigger (refer to "5. 10. 6 Setting conditional trace"). Setting of event conditions is easily done by dragging the icon of the event to be set from the event manager area and dropping it in this area. For details, refer to "5. 11. 3 Setting event conditions". (3) Section Start, Section End This area is used to set event conditions for starting and stopping a section trace (refer to "5. 10. 6 Setting conditional trace"). Setting of event conditions is easily done by dragging the icon of the event to be set from the event manager area and dropping it in this area. For details, refer to "5. 11. 3 Setting event conditions". (4) Qualify This area is used to set an event condition for a qualify trace (refer to "5. 10. 6 Setting conditional trace"). If two or more events are set, trace is performed when each event occurs. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM For the number of items that can be set to this area, refer to "Table 6-19 For the number of items that can be set to this area, refer to "Table 6-19 Number of Events Settable". Number of Events Settable". The mark on the left of this area indicates the utilization status of events (refer to "Table 5-16 (5) (4) (3) Section Start, Section End Qualify Event Manager Event icon"). The 227 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE The number of event conditions that can be set in this area is as follows: The number of event link conditions that can be set in this area, refer to "5. 11. 4 Number of enabled events for each event condition" Connected IE IECUBE 14 (8a/6) Can be used to events after execution a. Setting of event conditions is easily done by dragging the icon of the event to be set from the event manager area and dropping it in this area. For details, refer to "5. 11. 3 Setting event conditions". (5) Event Manager tion in event manager area".) Function Buttons Refer to " Function buttons (Related event function)" in the Event Manager. 228 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM This area is used to display the list of the events registered. (Refer to "Table 5-16 Table 6-19 Number of Events Settable Total (execution/access) Event icon", "(4) Manipula- CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Delay Count dialog box IECUBE This dialog box is used to set or display delay count values. (Refer to "5. 10 Trace Function (When IECUBE Connected)".) By setting a delay count value, a trace can be executed the number of times specified by the delay count value after the delay trigger event condition set in the Trace dialog box has been satisfied. (Refer to "5. 10. 6 Setting conditional trace".) Figure 6-51 Delay Count Dialog Box - Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons Opening Select [Event ] menu -> [Delay Count...]. Explanation of each area (1) Delay Count The following items can be selected. FIRST MIDDLE LAST Places the trigger pointer at the first of the trace data, traces all frames, and then stops the tracer. Places the trigger pointer at the center of the trace data, traces a half of all frames, and then stops the tracer. Places the trigger pointer at the end of the trace data and immediately stops the tracer. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 229 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Caution The delay count value differs according to the trace memory size specified in the Extended Option dialog box. Example: When the trace memory size is 256 K frames, FIRST.......256K - 1frames MIDDLE...(256K / 2) - 1frames LAST........5frames Function buttons OK Restore Cancel Help Validates the settings and closes this dialog box. Restores the previous settings. Closes this dialog box. Displays this dialog box online help files. 230 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Event Manager This window is used to manage event conditions. This window allows display, enabling/disabling, and deletion of the Various Event Conditions. (Refer to "5. 11 Event function".) A number of other operations using Context menu, Function buttons (Related event function), etc., can be performed in this window. The event icon is the jump pointer of the Jump function. Figure 6-52 Event Manager (In detailed display mode) - Opening - Explanation of each area - [View]menu (Event manager-dedicated items) - Context menu - Function buttons (Related event function) Opening Click the Mgr button, or select [Event] menu -> [Event Manager]. Explanation of each area (1) Event display area This area displays the icons (event icons) of the registered Various Event Conditions. By selecting the context menu -> [Detail], the details can be displayed. (a) [In list displayed] User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 231 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE The event icon is the jump pointer (refer to "5. 14. 2 Jump function"). (b) In detailed display Details of event contents are displayed by using the following key information as a separator. Key Information Event condition [S] [Z] [A] [D] [M] Event link condition [P1] - [P4] [D] [P] Break condition [B] Break condition Event link condition on "n"th line Disable condition Pass count condition Status condition Access size condition Address condition Symbol or expression: (actual address) Data condition Symbol or expression: (actual address) Mask condition Trace condition (when IECUBE connected) [M] [D] [S] [E] [S1] - [S4] [E1] - [E4] [Q] Trace mode Delay Count Trace start condition Trace end condition Section trace start condition Section trace end condition Qualify trace condition Timer condition (When IECUBE Connected) [S] [E] Timer measurement start condition Timer measurement end condition 232 Table 6-20 Displays event icon (refer to "Table 5-16 Event icon"). Separator for Displaying Event Details Contents User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Key Information [U] [B] Timer measurement unit Timeout break condition [View]menu (Event manager-dedicated items) The following items are added in the [View] menu , when the Event Manager is active. Select All Event Delete Event Sort By Name Sort By Kind Unsort Detail Overview Selects all the registered events. Deletes a selected event. Displays icons in the order of event names. Displays icons in the order of event types. Does not sort icons (default). Displays the details List display (default) Context menu Sort By Name Sort By Kind Unsort Detail Overview Source Text Displays icons in the order of event names. Displays icons in the order of event types. Does not sort icons (default). Displays the details. List display (default). Displays the corresponding source text and source line, using the position of the selected event as the jump destination address. (Refer to "5. 14. 2 Jump function".) If no line information exists at the jump destination address, however, you cannot jump. Opens the Source window. If an active Source window is open, that window is displayed in the forefront (so that it can be manipulated). Displays the Assemble window from the position of the selected event, which is used as the jump destination address. (Refer to "5. 14. 2 Jump function".) Opens the Assemble window. If an active Assemble window is open, that window is displayed in the forefront (so that it can be manipulated). Displays the memory contents from the position of the selected event, which is used as the jump destination address. (Refer to "5. 14. 2 Jump function".) Opens the Memory window. If an active Memory window is open, that window is displayed in the forefront (so that it can be manipulated). Assemble Memory Function buttons (Related event function) Describes the all function buttons the related event dialogs (the Event Manager, Event dialog box, the Event Link Table 6-20 Separator for Displaying Event Details Contents User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 233 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE dialog box,the Break dialog box, the Trace dialog box and the Timer dialog box.) OK (Event dialog box, Event Link dialog box) Automatically registers the event condition being edited, if any, and closes this dialog box. In the select mode An event condition is selected and the setting dialog box (indicated on the title bar) that called the Event Link dialog box is displayed again. If the calling dialog box has already been closed, the select mode is returned to the normal mode, and the Event dialog box is not closed. Otherwise, this dialog box will be closed. (Other than above dialog boxes) Automatically registers the event condition being edited, if any, and closes this dialog box. Each event condition becomes valid as soon as it has been registered. New (Event Manager) Opens the dialog box to create new event condition. By clicking each button of Clear Restore Cancel / Close Help Event Link... Break... Trace... Timer... Manager 234 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Add Event... Opens theEvent dialog boxin the select mode, and selects or newly creates an event condition to be set. The event condition will be added to the area selected when the < Add Event...> button is pressed. Opens the Event Link dialog box in the select mode, and selects or newly creates an event link condition. The event condition will be added to the area selected when the < Add Link...> button is pressed. Opens the various event setting dialog box corresponding to the selected event condition (one). Each setting dialog box displays the contents of the selected event condition. Same operation as double-clicking the event icon or pressing the Enter key. Deletes the selected event. When an event condition or an event link condition is to be deleted, an error occurs and the event condition or event link condition cannot be deleted if the event is used as a various event condition. Deletes all event conditions except software break events Turns on (Expand>>>) or off (Shrink<<<) display of the event manager area. The size of the dialog box is expanded or reduced. The event condition and event link condition selected in Event Manager area add to setting area with a focus. Opens the Select Display Information dialog box. This dialog box is used to change the display mode and rearrange event names. Add Link... Open Remove / Delete Delete All Expand >>> / Shrink <<< Add Info... User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Figure 6-53 Select Display Information Dialog Box 235 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Software Break Manager This window is used to display, enable or disable, and delete software breaks . (Refer to "5. 4. 4 Hardware break and software break".) Software breakpoints cannot be set in this window; they can be set in the Source window or the Assemble window. (Refer to "5. 4. 2 Breakpoint setting".) Caution Software breaks can be set or deleted while the user program is being executed. While the user program is being executed, software breaks can be set ,deleted, enable or disable. The warning of a purport which makes a user program once take a break is displayed. Figure 6-54 Software Break Manager - Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons Opening Select [Event] menu -> [Software Break Manager]. Explanation of each area (1) Name (2) Brk (3) File#Line / Symbol+Offset (4) Address 236 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (1) Name This area displays the names of registered events, and the check boxes that indicate whether each event is enabled or disabled. An event name is displayed in the form of Swb+[number] in the default condition. It can be changed to an alphanumeric string of up to 256 characters. To change an event name, select and click a name. Then directly edit the name. To set the editing, press the Enter key. When an event is enabled, the check box is checked. To be disable, the check box is not checked. Furthermore, the name jumps to the Source window by double-clicking an event name if the event name corresponds to the source line, whereas the name jumps to the Assemble window if it does not correspond to the source line. Remark By clicking "Name" (on the label), the character strings of the displayed items can be compared and sorted lexicographically (in alphabetical order). Whether the character strings are compared or sorted in ascending or descending order can be alternately selected by clicking the mouse. (2) Brk The '>' mark is displayed for a software break event that is set at the current PC position (so that the software break event that caused a break can be easily identified). (3) File#Line / Symbol+Offset This area displays the location at which a software break event was set as follows: - Program$file name#line number (If the event corresponds to the source line. ) - Program$file name#symbol+offset (If the event dose not correspond to the source line. Events are evaluated based on this when a symbol is re-downloaded. Remark By clicking "File#Line/Symbol+Offset" (on the label), the character strings of the displayed items can be compared and sorted lexicographically (in alphabetical order). Whether the character strings are compared or sorted in ascending or descending order can be alternately selected by clicking the mouse. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 237 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (4) Address This area displays the address at which a software break event is set. Remark By clicking "Address" (on the label), the numeric values of the displayed items can be compared and sorted. Whether the values are compared or sorted in ascending or descending order can be alternately selected by clicking the mouse. Function buttons Enable Disable Delete Delete ALL Close Enables the selected event. Disables the selected event. Deletes the selected event. Deletes all the set software break events. Closes this window. 238 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Event dialog box This dialog box is used to register and display event conditions. (Refer to "5. 11 Event function".) Setting of event conditions is done by setting each item in this dialog box and then pressing the - Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons (Related event function) Opening In normal mode If the Event dialog box is opened as follows, an event condition can be registered without its purpose being specified. Click the Evn button, or select [Event] menu -> [Event...]. In select mode If the User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 239 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of each area (1) Event Name (2) Event Status (3) Access Size (4) Address (5) Data, Mask (6) Event Manager (1) Event Name This area is used to set an event name. Directly input an alphanumeric string of up to eight characters as a name. To display the contents of an already created event condition, select from the drop-down list. In the select mode, the selected event condition can be set in the event condition setting area of the setting dialog box that called the Event dialog box. gray E. mark indicates that the event condition is being edited and has not been registered yet. (2) Event Status This area is used to select a status condition. By specifying a status condition, the type of the execution event and an access event is determined (if an execution event is specified, nothing can be input to the (3) Access Size and (5) Data, Mask). The status conditions that can be specified are listed below. Table 6-21 Status condition Status Execution event Execution Before Execution Access event R/W Read Write Note RW R W Data read/write Data read Data write EX EX-B Program execution Program execution (break before execution) Note Abbreviati on Meaning Multiple items can be specified, but only two items, including access events, can be enabled. The address range cannot be specified. Can be used only for break event conditions. 240 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM The mark on the left of this area indicates the utilization status of events (refer to "Table 5-16 Event icon"). The CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (3) Access Size This area is used to select an access size condition. By selecting an access size condition from the drop-down list, the access width of a data condition to be detected by an access event is determined. Byte Half Word Word No Condition Bit Detects data condition with 8-bit width (only during 8-bit access). Detects data condition with 16-bit width (only during 16-bit access). Detects data condition with 32-bit width (only during 32-bit access). Does not detect access size (nothing can be input to the Data area). Detects data condition with 1-bit width (only during 8-bit access). In this case, a data condition is detected with 1-bit width. Because of the operation of the in-circuit emulator, access to a bit is not directly detected; the ID850QB detects a dummy bit access by internally setting address conditions and data conditions as follows: Input example: Address: FE20.1 Data: 1 | Setting of trace search Address: FE20 Data: 00000010B Mask: 11111101B If another bit of the same address is accessed or if all the 8 bits of the same address are accessed, therefore, an event is detected in accordance with the specified status if the address and bit match the specified value of [address.bit]. Caution When data is written to a bit, all the 8 bits are read/written. If read or read/write is specified as the status, an event occurs if a read operation is performed at this time if the value of the specified [Address.bit] matches. If no access size condition is specified, a judgment is automatically made from the address condition and data condition, and the following is set: - Bit if the address condition is set in bit units - Byte if the data condition is set in 8-bit units - Half Word if the data condition is set in 16-bit units - Word if the address condition is set in 32-bit units - No Condition if no data condition is specified (4) Address This area is used to specify an address condition (address value, mask value). The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal. A data can be also specified by a symbol (refer to User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 241 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Settable range 0 <= address value <= 0xFFFFFFFF (a) Address None Set an address condition (lower address - higher address) (may be omitted). The following can be set: Caution Specify a 28-bit address, since physical address and image space are distinguished in setting event. (i) Setting as a point Set a value to only the lower address, or set the same value to the lower address and the higher address. (ii) Setting as a range (iii) Set a value to the lower address and the higher address. Setting as a bit Set a value to only the lower address, or set the same value to the lower address and the higher address. Specify a value in the form of address.bit. The value of bit, which indicates the bit position, must be 0 >= bit >= 7. (5) Data, Mask This area is used to set data conditions. The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal. The settable range differs as follows depending on the access size condition specified in (3) Access Size. Access Size Byte Half Word Word Bit 0 <= data value <= 0xFF 0 <= mask value <= 0xFF 0 <= data value <= 0xFFFF 0 <= mask value <= 0xFFFF 0 <= data value <= 0xFFFFFFFF 0 <= mask value <= 0xFFFFFFFF Data value = 0 or 1 Mask value = Cannot be specified. (a) Data Symbols"). 242 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Set a data value as data conditions. A data can be also specified by a symbol (refer to "Table 5-6 Table 6-23 "Table 5-6 Specifying Symbols"). Table 6-22 Settable Range of Address Condition (Event) Remark Settable Range of Data Condition Settable range Specifying CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (b) Mask Set a mask value for the data value. When a mask is set, the data value for the bit whose mask value is 1 may be 0 or 1. Example 1: Data Mask 0x4000 0xFF With this setting, addresses 0x4000 to 0x40FF satisfy the condition. Example 2: Data Mask 0x4000 0x101 With this setting, addresses 0x4000, 0x4001, 0x4100, and 0x4101 satisfy the condition. (6) Event Manager tion in event manager area".) Function Buttons Refer to " Function buttons (Related event function)" in the Event Manager. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM This area is used to display the list of the events registered. (Refer to "Table 5-16 Event icon", "(4) Manipula- 243 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Event Link dialog box This dialog box is used to register and display event link conditions. (Refer to "5. 11 Event function".) Registration of event link conditions is done by setting each item (256 items max.) in this dialog box and then pressing the - Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons (Related event function) Opening In normal mode If the Event Link dialog box is opened as follows, an event link condition can be registered without its purpose being specified. Select [Event] menu -> [Event Link...]. In select mode If the 244 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of each area (1) Link Name (2) Phase1, Phase2, Phase3, Phase4 (3) Disable (4) Pass Count (5) Event Manager (1) Link Name This area is used to set a event link name. Directly input an alphanumeric string of up to eight characters as a name. To display the contents of an already created event link condition, select from the drop-down list. In the select mode, the selected event condition can be set in the event link condition setting area of the setting dialog box that called the Event Link dialog box. icon").The mark "L" in gray indicates that an event link condition is being edited and has not been registered yet. (2) Phase1, Phase2, Phase3, Phase4 This area is used to specify the sequence in which event conditions and events are detected. Up to four sequences can be specified. If a disable condition is detected while the program is being executed, however, the event conditions that have so far been satisfied are initialized, and the event conditions are detected again starting from the first event condition. If a link condition and a disable condition are detected at the same time, the disable condition takes precedence. Set Phase 1 -> Phase 2 -> Phase 3 -> Phase 4, in that order.Phase 4 does not have to be set. In this case, an event occurs when the event condition set for the last phase has been detected. An event condition can be set for only Phase 1 or the same event condition can be set for two or more Phases. The number of event conditions that can be set to each phase of this area and while the dialog box, is as follows: User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM The mark on the left of this area indicates the utilization status of event link conditions ("Table 5-16 Event 245 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Connected IE IECUBE N-Wire CARD Nx85ET RCU0+TEU+TRCU 10 a. b. c. Can be set in Phase1-4 (expect before execution) Can be set only in Phase 1 and Phase 2 (must always be set in two stages) Only events before execution (3) Disable This area is used to set an event condition that invalidates the event conditions that have so far been satisfied Setting of event conditions is easily done by dragging the icon of the event to be set from the event manager area and dropping it in this area. For details, refer to "5. 11. 3 Setting event conditions". (4) Pass Count This area is used to set a pass count condition (settable range: 1 to 32767). A pass count condition specifies how many times an event condition must be satisfied during user program execution before a given condition is satisfied. If no pass count is specified, 1 is assumed (the condition is satisfied as soon as the event condition is satisfied). (5) Event Manager tion in event manager area".) Function Buttons Refer to " Function buttons (Related event function)" in the Event Manager. 246 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM This area is used to display the list of the events registered. (Refer to "Table 5-16 ("Table 6-24 The Number of Event Conditions in Event Link Dialog Box"). Nx85E901 RCU1 Table 6-24 The Number of Event Conditions in Event Link Dialog Box Total (execution/ access) 14 (8/6) 12(max) 2c Each phase 10 Disable area 10a 1b 12(max) - RCU0 Event icon", "(4) Manipula- CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Break dialog box This dialog box is used to register; set, and display break event conditions. (Refer to "5. 11 Event function", "5. 4 Break Function".) Registration and setting of break event conditions is done by setting each item (256 items max.) in this dialog box and then pressing the - Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons (Related event function) Opening Click the Brk button, or select [Event] menu -> [Break...]. Explanation of each area (1) Break Name (2) Break Event (3) Event Manager User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 247 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (1) Break Name This area is used to set a break event name. Directly input an alphanumeric string of up to eight characters as a name. To display the contents of an already created event condition, select from the drop-down list. The gray mark indicates that an event condition is being edited and has not been registered yet. By clicking the left mark, an event condition can be validated or invalidated. (2) Break Event This area is used to set an event condition for break. The number of event conditions that can be set in this area is as follows: Setting of event conditions is easily done by dragging the icon of the event to be set from the event manager Table 6-25 Number of Events Settable in Break Condition Setting Area Connected IE IECUBE N-Wire CARD Nx85ET RCU0+TEU+TRCU RCU0 RCU1 Total (before execution / after execution / access) 16 (2 / 8 / 6) 14 (2 / 8 / 4) 2 area and dropping it in this area. For details, refer to section "5. 11. 3 Setting event conditions". (3) Event Manager Manipulation in event manager area".) Function Buttons Refer to " Function buttons (Related event function)" in the Event Manager. 248 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM This area is used to display the list of the events registered. (Refer to "Table 5-16 Nx85E901 Event icon", "(4) The mark on the left of this area indicates the utilization status of events. (Refer to "Table 5-16 Event icon"). CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE View File Save dialog box This dialog box is used to save the current display information of the current window to a display file. (Refer to "5. 13. 2 Window display information (view file)".) Figure 6-58 View File Save Dialog Box - Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons Opening When the window to be saved is the current window, select [File] menu -> [Save As...]. Explanation of each area (1) Save in :, File name : (2) Save as type : (3) Save range (1) Save in :, File name : This area is used to specify the file name to be saved. A file name can be directly input from the keyboard, or selected from the list. Up to 257 character string with a extension can be specified. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 249 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (2) Save as type : Files".) The extension of the file corresponding to the current window is displayed. (3) Save range Specify the range of data to be saved. This area is displayed if the current window to be saved is the Assemble window, Memory window, Source window, Trace window. (a) All This should be selected to save the entire range, from the first line to the last line. (b) Screen shot This should be selected to save the area visible on the screen, from the top line on the screen to the bottom line. If the Source window is in the mixed display mode, however, the window contents are saved from the source line that includes the area visible on the screen. (c) Specify Line / Specify Frame / Specify Address This should be selected to specify the start line and end line of the area to be saved. If the start line and end line are omitted, the first line and last line are assumed. If a range of 100 lines / 100 frames / 256 bytes or more is specified, a message dialog box is displayed to indicate the progress of saving. To stop saving midway, click the Specify Address 250 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Specify Frame This area is used to specify the type (extension) of the file to be saved. (Refer to "Table 5-18 Type of the View CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Save Cancel Help Restore Saves the display information of tne current window to the selected file. After saving, this dialog box is closed. Closes this dialog box without executing anything. Displays this dialog box online help files. Restores the status before this dialog box was opened. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 251 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE View File Load dialog box This dialog box is used to read the view files. (Refer to "5. 13. 2 Window display information (view file)".) When a display file is loaded, the reference window (Source window in static status) opens and the display information at saving is displayed. The window to be opened and its status differ as follows, depending on the file to be loaded. - Loading source file to which symbol information has been read If there is a Source window in the active status, it is opened in the static status; otherwise, the Source window is opened in the active status. - Loading source file to which symbol information has not been read, or view file A window of text-format files is opened in the Source window in the static status. Figure 6-59 View File Load Dialog Box - Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons Opening Click the Open button or select [File] menu -> [Open...]. 252 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of each area (1) Look In:, File name : (2) Files of type : (1) Look In:, File name : This area is used to specify the file name to be loaded. A file name can be directly input from the keyboard, or selected from the list. Up to 257 character string with a extension can be specified. (2) Files of type : Files".) Function buttons Open Cancel Help Loads the selected file. After loading the file, this dialog box is closed. Closes this dialog box without executing anything. Displays this dialog box online help files. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM This area is used to specify the type (extension) of the file to be loaded. (Refer to "Table 5-18 Type of the View 253 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Environment Setting File Save dialog box This dialog box is used to save the setting contents of the current window to a setting file. (Refer to "5. 13. 3 Window setting information (setting file)".) Figure 6-60 Environment Setting File Save Dialog Box - Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons Opening When the window to be saved is the current window, select [File] menu -> [Environment] -> [Save As...]. Explanation of each area (1) Save in :, File name : (2) Save as type : (1) Save in :, File name : This area is used to specify the file name to be saved. A file name can be directly input from the keyboard, or selected from the list. Up to 257 character string with a extension can be specified. (2) Save as type : Setting Files"). 254 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM This area is used to specify the type (extension) of the file to be saved. (Refer to "Table 5-19 Type of the CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE The extension of the file corresponding to the current window is displayed. Function buttons Save Cancel Help Restore Saves the setting information of the current window to the selected file. After saving, this dialog box is closed. Closes this dialog box without executing anything. Displays this dialog box online help files. Restores the status before this dialog box was opened. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 255 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Environment Setting File Load dialog box This dialog box is used to read the setting files. (Refer to "5. 13. 3 Window setting information (setting file)".) When a setting file is loaded, the target window opens and the setting information at saving is restored. Figure 6-61 Environment Setting File Load Dialog Box - Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons Opening select [File] menu -> [Environment] -> [Open...]. Explanation of each area (1) Look In:, File name : (2) Files of type : (1) Look In:, File name : This area is used to specify the file name to be loaded. A file name can be directly input from the keyboard, or selected from the list. Up to 257 character string with a extension can be specified. (2) Files of type : Setting Files".) 256 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM This area is used to specify the type (extension) of the file to be loaded. (Refer to "Table 5-19 Type of the CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Open Cancel Help Loads the selected file. After loading the file, this dialog box is closed. Closes this dialog box without executing anything. Displays this dialog box online help files. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 257 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Reset Debugger dialog box This dialog box is used to initialize the ID850QB, CPU, and symbol information. Figure 6-62 Reset Debugger Dialog Box - Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons Opening Select [File] menu -> [Debugger Reset...]. Explanation of each area (1) Reset subject selection area This area is used to specify what is to be Initialized. Initializes the checked item. Debugger Symbol Target CPU Initializes the ID850QB (default). Initializes the symbol information. Initializes the CPU. Function buttons OK Cancel Help Initializes according to the setting. Cancels the changes and closes this dialog box. Displays this dialog box online help files. 258 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Exit Debugger dialog box This dialog box is used to select whether the current debug environment is saved to a project file or not before terminating the ID850QB. (Refer to "5. 13. 1 Debugging environment (project file)".) It can be specified in the Debugger Option dialog box that the ID850QB is terminated without this confirmation dialog box being opened. Figure 6-63 Exit Debugger Dialog Box - Opening - Function buttons Opening - Select [File] menu -> [Exit]. - If forcible termination, such as to terminate the application, has been executed on the task list that terminates Windows. Function buttons Yes Saves the current debug environment to a project file, closes all the windows, and terminates the ID850QB. If a project file name is not specified, the Project File Save dialog box is opened. If the < Cancel> button is selected on the Project File Save dialog box, the environment is neither saved to a project file nor is the ID850QB terminated. (If a project file is loaded or saved during debugger operation, this button has the default focus. ) Closes all the windows and terminates the ID850QB. (If a project file is not loaded or saved during debugger operation, this button has the default focus.) Closes this dialog box without executing anything. No Cancel User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 259 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE About dialog box This dialog box displays the version information of the ID850QB (the year is displayed in 4 digits). Remark The version information can be copied to the clipboard by selecting [Select All and Copy (&C)] from the context menu in the dialog box. The following version information is displayed: - Product version of ID850QB - Version of device file - Version of GUI - Version of debugger DLL - Version of assembler DLL - Version of executor - Version of Tcl/Tk - Product ID and product version of in-circuit emulator Figure 6-64 About Dialog Box - Opening - Function buttons 260 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Opening Select [Help] menu -> [About...], or click the Function buttons OK Closes this dialog box. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 261 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Console window This window is used to input commands that control the ID850QB . Because the key bind is Emacs-like, the accelerator key is not acknowledged if the Console window is active. However, the F1 key displays the online help files of the Console window. While the Console window is open, an error message window with only an - Opening Opening Select [Browse] menu -> [Console]. 262 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Font dialog box This dialog box is used to select the font and font size to be displayed in the Source window, the Watch window, the Quick Watch dialog box, the Local Variable window, the Stack Trace window. Figure 6-66 Font Dialog Box - Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons Opening Click the button in the Debugger Option dialog box. Explanation of each area (3) (2) (1) Font Face : Size : Sample User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 263 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (1) Font Face : This area is used to select a font from the fonts currently usable. Only fonts with equal width (fonts with a constant stroke width and a fixed pitch) are enumerated. When a font name is selected from the list, the font name is displayed in the text box, and the font size that can be used with that font is displayed under (2) Size :. (2) Size : This area is used to specify the font size (unit : pt.). On the drop-down list, the font size usable for the font specified in (1) Font Face : is displayed in point units. When the font size is selected from the drop-down list, the selected font size is displayed in this area. The font size can also be directly input to the text box from the keyboard. (3) Sample This area displays a sample character string of the specified font and size. Function buttons OK Cancel Validates the settings and closes this dialog box. Cancels the changes and closes this dialog box. 264 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Browse dialog box This dialog box is used to select the file to be set in the Source Text move dialog box. Remark If this dialog box is opened for the first time after the system has been started up, the directory first specified by the source path is displayed. When the dialog box is opened the second and subsequent times, the previously displayed directory is recorded and displayed again. If the - Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons Opening Click the Explanation of each area (1) Look In:, File name : (2) Files of type : User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 265 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (1) Look In:, File name : This area is used to specify the file name to be opened. A file name can be directly input from the keyboard, or selected from the list. Up to 257 character string with a extension can be specified. (2) Files of type : Displayed"). Function buttons Open Cancel Help Sets the selected file. After setting the file, this dialog box is closed. Closes this dialog box without executing anything. Displays this dialog box online help files. 266 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM This area is used to specify the type (extension) of the file to be opened (refer to "Table 5-5 File Type Can Be CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE This chapter explains the details of the command functions of the ID850QB. - Command Line Rules - Command List - List of Variables - List of Packages - Key Bind - Expansion window - Callback Procedure - Hook Procedure - Related Files - Cautions - Explanation of Commands - Samples (Calculator Script) 7. 1 Command Line Rules The specification of command lines has the following rules: - Command name, option, and argument are specified for command line. - To divide words, a space (space key or tab key) is used. - At the end of a line, a line feed character or a semicolon is used. - When a command name and an option are entered to the point of identifiability, they are recognized. - In script, command names have to be entered completely. Command format command -options arg1 arg2 arg3 ... User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 267 CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE 7. 2 Command List Command name address assemble Evaluation of address expression Converts the address expression specified with expression into address. Disassemble/line assemble (a) Assembles the character strings specified by code from the address specified by address. Executing batch (with echo) Executes in batch with displaying files specified by script name on the screen. Setting/deletion of breakpoint (b) Operates the breakpoint specified by options and address. Setting of cache Sets I cache and D cache. Terminating ID850QB Terminate the ID850QB. Selecting debugger option Selects the debugger option. Download of files (l) Downloads files specified with filename according to options. Deletion of the internal flash memory Deletes the internal flash memory Creation of expansion window Creates expansion window with script file. Returning from function Executes until it returns to the program that called the current function. Manipulation related to internal flash memory Selects whether the clock-related settings during internal flash memory write are the device file settings or user settings. Continuous execution (g) Executes program continuously. Display of help Displays Dcl help. Setting of hook Sets the procedure for hook with script file. Display/setting of IE register The ie command depends on the IE. Symbol inspect Searches and displays the symbol of the load module specified with progname using the regular expression of pattern. Jump to window (j) Displays the window specified by options. Setting / deleting memory mapping Sets, deletes, and displays memory mapping. batch breakpoint cache dbgexit dbgopt download erase extwin finish flop go help hook ie inspect jump map 268 Table 7-1 ID850QBList of Debugger Control Commands Function User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE Command name mdi memory module next refresh register reset run step stop upload version watch where wish xtime xtrace Setting of expansion window Sets the size and title name of the expansion window. Display/setting of memory (m) Sets value in the memory of the address specified with address according to options. Display of the list of files and functions Displays the list of files and functions of the load module specified by progname. Procedure step (n) Executes the procedure steps. Redrawing of window Redraws the window and updates the data. Display/setting of register value and I/O register value Sets value in the register specified with regname. Reset Resets the CPU, ID850QB debugger or symbols. Reset and execution of CPU (r) Resets the program and executes it. Step execution (s) Executes step execution. Stop execution Stops the program forcibly. Upload Saves the memory data within the specified range in a file. Display of the version information Displays the version of the ID850QB. Display/setting of variables (w) Displays and sets the variables. Trace of stack Executes the back-trace of the stack. Start of Tclet Starts up the script using Tk (Tclet). Operation of timer Operates timer. Operation of tracer( when IECUBEconnected) Operates tracer. Table 7-1 ID850QBList of Debugger Control Commands Function User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 269 CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE Command name alias cd clear echo exit history ls pwd source time tkcon unalias which Other Creation of another name Change of directory Clears the screen Echo Close/end Display of history Display of files Check of the directory Execution of batch Measurement of time for commands Console control Deletion of another name Display of the command path or another name Based on Tcl/Tk 8.4 7. 3 List of Variables - dcl(chip) - Chip name read only - dcl(prjfile) - Project file name read only - dcl(srcpath) - Source path read only - dcl(ieid) - IE type read only - dcl(iestat) - IE status read only - dcl(bkstat) - Break status read only - env(LANG) - Language - dcl_version - Dcl version read only 7. 4 List of Packages - tcltest - Restoration test - cwind - Automatic window control - BWidget - Toolkit - Tcllib - Tcl library - mclistbox - Multi-column list box - combobox - Combo box 270 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Table 7-2 List of Console/Tcl Commands Function CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE 7. 5 Key Bind - tcsh + emacs like - Complement of command name [Tab] - Complement of file name [Tab] - HTML help [F1] 7. 6 Expansion window The expansion windows can be created using Tk. In the expansion windows, Widget is allocated with '.dcl' as a root instead of '.'. When the following script files are allocated in bin/idtcl/tools/, an expansion window is added on selecting [Browse] menu - [Others]. The mdi command, an exclusive command for expansion windows, has been added. # Sample.tcl wm protocol .dcl WM_DELETE_WINDOW { exit } mdi geometry 100 50 button .dcl.b -text Push -command exit pack .dcl.b Caution In expansion windows, Tk menu commands cannot be used because of the restrictions of MDI windows. 7. 7 Callback Procedure Expansion windows can hold dcl_asyncproc procedures called by asynchronous messages. proc dcl_asyncproc {mid} { if {$mid == 19} { redraw } } The asynchronous message ID is passed for the argument of the dcl_asyncproc procedure The message IDs are shown below: User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 271 CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE Message ID 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 18 19 20 36 37 40 41 42 45 46 After changing configuration After registering event After deleting event Before executing After breaking After resetting CPU After resetting ID850QB After changing extended option After changing debugger option After downloading After changing memory or register Before starting tracer(when IECUBEconnected) After stopping tracer (when IECUBEconnected) Before starting timer (when IECUBEconnected) After stopping timer (when IECUBEconnected) After clearing trace (when IECUBE connected) After resetting symbol After change from RRM function to trace function, and change from trace function to RRM function. 7. 8 Hook Procedure A hook can be set in the ID850QB using the hook procedure. The hook procedures are shown below: - BeforeDownload (Hook before downloading) - AfterDownload (Hook after downloading) - AfterCpuReset(Hook after CPU reset) - BeforeCpuRun (Hook before starting execution) - AfterCpuStop (Hook after breaking) By using hook procedures, register values can be changed before downloading programs or after resetting the CPU. An actual example of the procedure is shown below. A hook is valid till the ID850QB is closed. 272 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Table 7-3 Message ID Meaning CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE [When hook is set with ID850QB control command] 1) 2) 3) Create script file a. with an editor. Start up the ID850QB, select [Browse] menu -> [Console], and open the Console window. If the script file is executed in the window as below, the hook in the script file is set. %hook test.tcl [When hook is set on downloading of project file] 1) Create script file a. with an editor. Caution Be sure that the script file name is the same as the project file. Example: The script file corresponding to test.prj is test.tcl. Allocate test.prj, test.pri, and test.tcl in the same directory. 2) Start up the ID850QBand read test.prj. The hook in the script file is set. proc BeforeDownload {} { register MM 0x7 register PMC8 0xff register PMC9 0xff register PMCX 0xe0 } proc AfterCpuReset {} { register MM 0x7 register PMC8 0xff register PMC9 0xff register PMCX 0xe0 } 7. 9 Related Files - Executes when the aliases.tcl console is opened. Sets the default alias etc. - Executes when the project file name.tcl project is opened. The hook of BeforeDownload, AfterDownload, AfterCpuReset, BeforeCpuRun and AfterCpuStop can be used. - Executes when the load module name.tcl load module is downloaded. The hook of BeforeDownload, AfterDownload, AfterCpuReset, BeforeCpuRun and AfterCpuStop can be used. 7. 10 Cautions - The separator for file and path is a slash (/). - When a console or an expansion window is active, the accelerator key cannot be acknowledged. - When a console is open, error messages are output to the console. - To terminate the command forcibly, close the console. - The execution of external commands (DOS commands) is OFF by default. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 273 CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE 7. 11 Explanation of Commands In this section, each command is explained using the format shown below. Command name Describes the command name. Input format Describes the input format of the command. In the following explanation, italics indicate an Argument to be supplied by the user, while the argument enclosed in "?" may be omitted. When a command name and an option are entered to the point of identifiability, they are recognized. Functions Explains the functions of the command. Usage example Shows an example of the usage of the command. 274 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE address address - Evaluation of address expression Input format address expression Functions Converts the address expression specified by expression into address. Usage example (IDCON) 1 % address main 0xaa (IDCON) 2 % address main+1 0xab User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 275 CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE assemble assemble - Disassemble/line assemble Input format assemble ?options? address ?code? Functions Assembles the character strings specified by codefrom the address specified by address. When '.' is specified for address, it is understood as an address continuing from the immediately previous assemble. When code is omitted, it is assembled from the address specified by address. The following are options: They are ignored for assembly. -code -number number Command code is also displayed.It is ignored for assembly. number line is displayed. It is ignored for assembly. Usage example (IDCON) 1 % assemble -n 5 main 0x000000aa B7 PUSH HL 0x000000ab B1 PUSH AX 0x000000ac 891C MOVW AX,SP 0x000000ae D6 MOVW HL,AX 0x000000af A100 MOV A,#0H (IDCON) 2 % assemble main mov a,b (IDCON) 3 % assemble . mov a,b 276 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE batch batch - Executing batch (with echo) Input format batch scriptname Functions Executes in batch with displaying files specified by scriptname on the screen. Nesting is possible. Usage example (IDCON) 1 % clear (IDCON) 2 % batch bat_file.tcl (IDCON) 3 % tkcon save a:/log.txt User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 277 CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE breakpoint breakpoint - Setting/deletion of breakpoint Input format breakpoint ?options? ?address1? ?address2? breakpoint -delete brkno breakpoint -delete brkno breakpoint -disable brkno breakpoint -information Functions Operates the breakpoint specified by options and address . If a breakpoint can be set correctly, the breakpoint number is returned. The following are options: -software -hardware -execute -beforeexecute -read -write -access -size size -data value -datamask value -information -delete -disable -enable A software break is specified. A hardware break is specified (default). The address execution break is set (default). The break before address execution is set. An address data read break is set. An address data write break is set. An address data access break is set. The access size is set (8, 16, or 32bit). The data condition is set. The data mask is set. The list of breakpoints is displayed. The breakpoint whose number is specified is deleted. The breakpoint whose number is specified is disabled. The breakpoint whose number is specified is enabled. Usage example (IDCON) 1 % breakpoint main 1 (IDCON) 2 % breakpoint -i 1 Brk00001 enable rammon.c#17 (IDCON) 3 % breakpoint -software sub 2 (IDCON) 4 % breakpoint -i 278 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE 1 Brk00001 enable rammon.c#17 2 Brk00001 enable rammon.c#8 (IDCON) 5 % breakpoint -disable 2 (IDCON) 6 % breakpoint -i 1 Brk00001 enable rammon.c#17 2 Brk00001 disable rammon.c#8 (IDCON) 7 % breakpoint -delete 1 2 Brk00001 disable rammon.c#8 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 279 CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE cache When N-Wire CARD connected cache - Setting of cache Input format cache cache config ?-icache itype? ?-dcache dtype? cache clear ?-icache bool? ?-dcache bool? Functions When config is specified for the subcommand, the cache type is set. When clear is specified for the subcommand, whether cache clear is to be done by EXEC, or not, is set (default is clear) When subcommand or below is omitted, the current status is displayed. itype is selected from the following: NB85E212 NB85E213 nouse NB85E212 is used. NB85E213 is used. Not used (default). dtype is selected from the following: NB85E252 NB85E263 nouse NB85E252 is used. NB85E263 is used. Not used (default). bool is selected from the following: 0, false, or off 11, true, or on Off On Usage example (IDCON) 1 % cache config -i NB85E212 -d NB85E252 (IDCON) 2 % cache i-cache: NB85E212 i-cache: NB85E252 (IDCON) 3 % cache clear -i false (IDCON) 4 % cache i-cache: NB85E212 (persist) d-cache: nouse 280 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE dbgexit Tdbgexit - Terminating ID850QB Input format dbgexit ?options? Functions Terminate the ID850QB. The following are options: -saveprj Project is saved on terminating ID850QB. Usage example (IDCON) 1 % dbgexit -saveprj User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 281 CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE dbgopt dbgopt - Selecting the debugger option Input format dbgopt options ?value? Functions Selects the option of the debugger. The following are options: -function ?func? Switches the RRM function and trace function (when IECUBE connected). When func is omitted, the current function is displayed. func is selected from the following: rrm trace RRM function is selected. Trace function is selected. Usage example (IDCON) 1 % dbgopt ?function trace 282 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE download download - Download of files Input format download ?options? filename ?offset? Functions Downloads files specified with filename according to options. If offset is specified, the address is shifted by the offset (if the data is in binary format, the load start address is specified for offset). -binary -append -nosymbol -symbolonly -erase -reset -information Binary format data is downloaded. Additional download is executed. Download is executed. Symbol information is not read. Symbol information is read. The contents of the internal flash memory are erased all before download (only a product with internal flash memory) (when N-Wire CARD connected). CPU is reset after download. Download information is displayed. Usage example (IDCON) 1 % download test.lmf User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 283 CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE erase When N-Wire CARD connected erase - Deletion of the internal flash memory Input format extwin scriptfile Functions Deletes the internal flash memory Usage example (IDCON) 1 % erase 284 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE extwin extwin - Creation of expansion window Input format extwin scriptfile Functions Creates expansion window with scriptfile. Usage example (IDCON) 1 % extwin d:/foo.tcl User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 285 CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE finish finish - Returning from function Input format finish Functions Executes until it returns to the program that called the current function. Usage example (IDCON) 1 % finish 286 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE flop When N-Wire CARD connected flop - Manipulation related to internal flash memory Input format flop -init flop -user clock Functions Selects whether the clock-related settings during internal flash memory write are the device file settings or user settings. When the -init option is specified, processing is performed using the device file setting. If the device file contains no information, an error occurs during internal flash memory write. In this case, use the -user option. When the -user option is specified, IOR of the clock generation function is manipulated. Specify for clock the frequency (MHz) of the CPU clock (fCPU) determined by the IOR manipulation. In this case, perform the IOR setting using the hook procedure. Usage example (IDCON) 1 % flop -user 13.5 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 287 CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE go go - continuous execution Input format go ?options? Functions Executes program continuously.If -waitbreak is specified, the command waits until the program stops. The following are options: -ignorebreak -waitbreak Breakpoint is ignored. The command waits for the program to stop. Usage example (IDCON) 1 % go -w 288 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE help help - Display of help Input format help Functions Displays Dcl help. Usage example (IDCON) 1 % help User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 289 CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE hook hook - Setting of hook Input format hook scriptfile Functions Sets the procedure for hook with scriptfile. The hook setting is initialized when the project file is loaded and when the ID850QB is reset. Usage example (IDCON) 1 % hook d:/foo.tcl 290 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE ie ie - Display/setting of IE register Input format ie reg address ?value? ie dcu address ?value? Functions The ie command depends on the IE. When reg is specified for the subcommand, referencing and setting of the IE register is executed. When dcu is specified for the subcommand, referencing and setting of the DCU register is executed. CautionThe value of a register will be reset by 0 if a DCU register is referred to. Usage example (IDCON) 1 % ie reg 0x100 1 (IDCON) 2 % ie dcu 0x100 1 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 291 CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE inspect inspect - Symbol inspect Input format inspect ?options? progname pattern Functions Searches and displays the load module symbol specified with progname using the regular expression of pattern. The following regular expressions can be used. ? * [chars] \x The following are options: -nocase -address Does not distinguish between upper and lowercase. Displays in pair with symbol address. Match 1 character Match characters other than 0 Match chars character. Range specification such as [a-z/0-9] also possible. Match character x. ? ? * [ ] \ specification also possible. Usage example (IDCON) 1 % inspect test1.out {[a-z]*} 292 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE jump jump - Jump to window Input format jump -source -line filename ?line? jump ?options? address Functions Displays the window specified by options. -source -assemble -memory -line -focus The Source window is displayed from the address specified by address. The Assemble window is displayed from the address specified by address. The Memory window is displayed from the address specified by address. The command is moved to the line specified by line. The Focus is moved to the window displayed. Usage example (IDCON) 1 % jump -s main (IDCON) 2 % jump -s -l mainfile.c 10 (IDCON) 3 % jump -m array User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 293 CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE map map - Setting/deletion of memory mapping Input format map options address1 address2 ?accsize? Functions Sets, deletes, and displays memory mapping. The access size of 8, 16, or 32 is specified by accsize (unit:byte, the default is 8). The following are options: -target -protect -rrm Target area is mapped. I/O protect area is mapped. Start address of real-time RAM monitor area is set. If performed during user program execution, CPU is stopped for an instant. Real-time RAM monitor area can be divided into 8 partitions. The start address and size are specified in pairs in list format as follows. {{address size} {address size} {address size} ...} size is one of 256, 512, 768, 1024, 1280, 1536, 1792, 2048 bytes, and the total size is up to 2048. All the settings for the mapping are deleted. Refer to the setting for the mapping. -clear -information Usage example (IDCON) 1 % map -i 1: 0 0x7fff 8 {IROM} 2: 0x8000 0x87ff 8 {Target RRM} 3: 0x8800 0x9fff 8 {Target} 4: 0xa000 0xf7ff 8 {NonMap} 5: 0xf800 0xfaff - {NonMap} 6: 0xfb00 0xfedf 8 {Saddr} 7: 0xfee0 0xfeff 8 {Register} 8: 0xff00 0xffff 8 {SFR} (IDCON) 2 % map -erom 0x100000 0x10ffff (IDCON) 3 % map -c 294 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE mdi mdi - Setting of expansion window Input format mdi geometry ?x y? width height mdi title string Functions Sets the size and title name of the expansion window. The command can be used only from the expansion window. Usage example (IDCON) 1 % mdi geometry 0 0 100 100 (IDCON) 2 % mdi title foo User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 295 CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE memory memory - Display/setting of memory Input format memory ?options? address ?value? memory ?options? -fill address1 address2 value memory ?options? -copy address1 address2 address3 Functions Sets value in the memory of the address specified by address according to options. If value is omitted, display the value of the memory of the address specified by address. If -fill is specified, data from address1 to address2 is filled with value . If -copy is specified, data from address1 to address2 is copied to address3. The following are options: -byte -halfword -word -fill -copy -noverify Displayed/set in one-byte units (default). Displayed/set in halfword units. Displayed/set in word units. The data is filled in. The data is copied. Verification is not executed on writing. If memory referencing is performed for other than the real-time RAM monitor area during user program execution, the CPU is stopped for an instant. The CPU is stopped for an instant even if the memory setting is performed. Usage example (IDCON) 1 % memory 100 0x10 (IDCON) 2 % memory 100 2 (IDCON) 3 % memory 100 0x02 (IDCON) 4 % memory -fill 0 1ff 0 296 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE module module - Display of the list of files and functions Input format module progname ?filename? Functions Displays the list of files and functions of the load module specified by progname. If filename is not specified, the list of files is displayed. If filename is specified, the list of functions of the specified files is displayed. Usage example (IDCON) 1 % module rammon.lmf 1: rammon.c (IDCON) 2 % module rammon.lmf rammon.c 1: rammon.c sub1 2: rammon.c main User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 297 CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE next next - Procedure step Input format next ?options? Functions Executes the procedure steps. If functions are called, the step stops after executing function. The following are options: -source -instruction The command is executed in source line units (default). The command is executed in command units. Usage example (IDCON) 1 % next -i (IDCON) 2 % next -s 298 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE refresh refresh - Redrawing of window Input format refresh Functions Redraws the window and updates the data. Usage example (IDCON) 1 % batch foo.tcl (IDCON) 2 % refresh User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 299 CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE register register - Display/setting of register value and I/O register value Input format register ?options? regname ?value? Functions Sets value in the register specified with regname. If value is omitted, displays the value of the register specified by regname. The following are options: -force Compulsory reading is executed. If register reference/setting is performed during user program execution, the CPU stops for an instant. Usage example (IDCON) 1 % register pc 0x0100 (IDCON) 2 % register pc 200 (IDCON) 3 % register pc 0x200 300 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE reset reset - Reset Input format reset ?options? Functions Resets the ID850QB , CPU or symbols. If options are omitted, the CPU is reset. The following are options: -cpu -debugger -symbol -event CPU is reset (default). The ID850QB is reset. Symbol is reset. Event is reset. Usage example (IDCON) 1 % reset User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 301 CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE run run - Reset and execution of CPU Input format run ?options? Functions Resets the program and executes it. If -waitbreak is not specified, the command does not wait until the program stops. The following are options: -waitbreak The command waits for the program to stop. Usage example (IDCON) 1 % run (IDCON) 2 % run -w 302 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE step step - Step execution Input format step ?options? Functions Executes step execution. If functions are called, the command stops at the head of the functions. The following are options: -source -instruction The command is executed in source line units (default). The command is executed in command units. Usage example (IDCON) 1 % step -i (IDCON) 2 % step -s User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 303 CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE stop stop - Stop executing Input format stop Functions Stops the program forcibly. Usage example (IDCON) 1 % run (IDCON) 2 % stop 304 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE upload upload - Upload Input format upload ?options? filename address1 address2 Functions Saves the memory data within the specified range in a file. The following are options: -binary -intel -motorola -tektronix -force The data is saved in binary format. The data is saved in Intel HEX format (default). The data is saved in Motorola HEX format. The data is saved in Tektronix HEX format. The file is overwritten. Usage example (IDCON) 1 % upload -b foo.hex 0 0xffff User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 305 CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE version version - Display of the version information Input format version Functions Displays the version of the ID850QB. Usage example (IDCON) 1 % version GUI : E2.00y [31-May-99] Devicefile : 78K0[uPD780034] E1.01a Debugger : 78K/0 Debugger E2.50c [02-Apr-99] Executer : 78K/0 Executer E1.3c Packet translator : 78K/0 Packet E2.00w Assembler : 78K/0 Asm/Disasm E1.15a [01-Apr-99] Tcl/Tk : 8.1.1 306 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE watch watch - Display/setting of variables Input format watch ?options? variable ?value? Functions Displays and sets the variables. The following are options: -binary -octal -decimal -hexdecimal -string -sizeof -encoding name The value is displayed in binary digits. The value is displayed in octal digits. The value is displayed in decimal digits. The value is displayed in hexdecimal digits. The value is displayed in character strings. The size, instead of the value, of variables is displayed in decimal digits. Encoding during character string display is specified. By default, system encoding is used. name (encoding name) is based on the Tcl specification (shiftjis, euc-jp, etc.). Usage example (IDCON) 1 % watch var 0x10 (IDCON) 2 % watch -d var 16 (IDCON) 3 % watch array\[0\] 0xa User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 307 CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE where where - Trace of stack Input format where Functions Executes the back-trace of the stack. Usage example (IDCON) 1 % where 1: test2.c#sub2(int i)#13 2: test.c#num(int i)#71 3: test.c#main()#82 308 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE wish wish - Startup of Tclet Input format wish scriptname Functions Starts up the script using Tk (Tclet). The expansion window can be created with Tclet. Usage example (IDCON) 1 % wish test.tcl User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 309 CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE xtime xtime - Operation of timer Input format xtime option Functions Operates timer. The following are options: -start -stop -gobreak Timer starts on executing the program. (when IECUBE connected) Timer stops on executing the program. (when IECUBE connected) Time from Go to Break is displayed in nsec. Usage example (IDCON) 1 % xtime -start (IDCON) 2 % xtime -stop 310 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE xtrace When IECUBE connected xtrace - Operation of tracer Input format xtrace -dump ?-append? frameno ?filename? xtrace -start xtrace -stop xtrace -clear xtrace -addup ?bool? xtrace -mode ?mode? xtrace -complement ?bool? Functions Operates tracer. The following are options: -start -stop -clear -dump The tracer starts on executing the program. The tracer stops on executing the program. Clears the trace memory. The trace data is dumped (default). The dump result is redirected to the console window. If the file name is specified, the dump result is written in the file. The dump result is added to a file. Whether the time tag is totaled or not is selected. (Addition only) When bool is omitted, the current mode is displayed. The trace control mode (any one of: all, cond, nonstop, fullstop, fullbreak, delaystop, delaybreak, machine, or event) is selected. When mode is omitted, the current mode is displayed. Selects whether to perform trace complementation. When bool is omitted, the current mode is displayed. -append -addup ?bool? -mode ?mode? -complement ?bool? Usage example (IDCON) 1 % xtrace -start (IDCON) 2 % xtrace -stop (IDCON) 3 % xtrace -dump 3 _ 01685 2 000000BC M1 br _sub2+0x2 _ 01686 4 0000009A BRM1 st.w r6, 0x8[sp] _ 01687 3 0000009E BRM1 st.w r0, 0x0[sp] (IDCON) 4 % xtrace -clear (IDCON) 5 % xtrace -addup true User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 311 CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE 7. 12 Samples (Calculator Script) The script of the expansion window in which the calculator script is described and its execution screen are shown below. Script of expansion window # Calculator.tcl mdi geometry 100 100 set top .dcl entry $top.e -relief sunken -textvariable v frame $top.f -height 120 -width 120; pack $top.e -fill x; pack $top.f -fill both -expand 1set i 0; set v {}; set r 0.25 foreach n {7 8 9 / 4 5 6 * 1 2 3 - 0 = + C} { if {$n == "=" || $n == "C"} { button $top.f.b$n -text $n } else { button $top.f.b$n -text $n -command "$top.e insert end $n" } place $top.f.b$n -relx [expr ($i%4)*$r] -rely [expr ($i/4)*$r] -relw $r -relh $r } bind $top.f.bC <1> {$top.e delete 0 end} bind $top.f.b= <1> {catch {expr $v} v} Figure 7-1 Execution Screen incr I 312 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM APPENDIX A EXPANSION WINDOW APPENDIX A EXPANSION WINDOW - Overview - Sample List of Expansion Window - Activation - Explanation of each sample window A. 1 Overview With the ID850QB, the user can create custom windows in addition to the existing windows. The Tcl (Tool Command Language) interpreter and the commands for controlling the debugger are implemented in the ID850QB. Users can create windows using this Tcl. The ID850QB is supplied with samples of the following expansion windows. A. 2 Sample List of Expansion Window Table A-1 List of Expansion Window (Sample) Window Name List window Grep window RRM window Hook window Memory Mapped I/O window A. 3 Activation The expansion window can be activated by selecting List, Grep, RRM, Hook, or Memory in [Others] on the [Browse] menu. Remark Each .tcl file is installed in NECTools32\BIN\idtcl\tools. A. 4 Explanation of each sample window Function Displays a list of the source files and functions. Searches a character string. This is the memory window for real-time RAM monitoring. Sets the hook procedure. Writes to or reads from the specified address. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 313 APPENDIX A EXPANSION WINDOW List window The lists of the source files and functions are displayed in a tree format in this window. When a function name in the list is clicked, the corresponding source is displayed. Figure A-1 List window When a function name in the list is clicked, the corresponding function portion is displayed in the Source window. 314 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM APPENDIX A EXPANSION WINDOW Grep window Search for a character string is performed in the files under the source path. When the search result is clicked, the corresponding source is displayed. Figure A-2 Grep window By clicking a character string line in the search result,the coressponding character string portion is displayed in the Source window. Object Pattern button Input the character string to be searched. Marks the searched character string. Clears the marking. Put the cursor on a section in the search result and click this button to open the corresponding file. Select whether or not to distinguish uppercase and lowercase. Specify the type of the file to be searched. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Function 315 APPENDIX A EXPANSION WINDOW RRM window This is a dedicated window for RAM monitoring. The address area in which a value was changed in the RAM area during program execution is highlighted with a color. The display range is 1 KB. With reading RAM, execution of the user program momentarily breaks. On this window, the start address of the RAM area can be changed while the user program is being executed. Caution 1 All data are not read at the same time (because data of 1 KB is divided and read in word units). Caution 2 This RRM window is opened even when the RAM monitor function is set to OFF in the Extended Option dialog box. Caution 3 The sampling interval is about 0.3 - 0.7 seconds (20MHz), but it depend on the frequency of the CPU operation (when the N-Wire CARD is connected). Figure A-3 RRM window Object Address Input the start address to be displayed (automatically aligned to 1 KB.) Switch the start address display. Reads data from the memory. The color can be customized. The default color is red. Specify whether or not to hold the color highlighting. Selected: Once a value is changed, the color highlighting is held until a break occurs. Unselected: The color is cleared if there is no change of values(default). Closes this window. 316 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Function APPENDIX A EXPANSION WINDOW Hook window This window is used to set a hook to the debugger, using a hook procedure. The hook procedure enables changing the register value before downloading a program, or after a CPU reset. On this window, a hook can be set by using the following four tabs. - [BeforeDownload] tab: Hook before downloading - [AfterCpuReset] tab: Hook after CPU reset - [BeforeCpuRun] tab: Hook before start of execution - [AfterCpuStop] tab: Hook after break By setting a peripheral I/O registers by using the [BeforeDownload] tab before downloading the load module, for example, downloading can be executed at high speeds. Access to the external memory is also facilitated by using this tab. If the setting is saved as "project-file-name.tcl" in the directory where the project is stored, the setting is executed when the project is next opened. Figure A-4 Hook window Object [BeforeDownload]Tab Hook before downloading Before downloading is performed, the register values input to the tab are automatically overwritten by the specified value. Hook after resetting CPU after resetting CPU, the register values input to the tab are automatically overwritten by the specified value. Hook before starting execution before starting execution, the register values input to the tab are automatically overwritten by the specified value. [AfterCpuReset]Tab [BeforeCpuRun]Tab User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Function 317 APPENDIX A EXPANSION WINDOW Object [AfterCpuStop]Tab Function Hook after breaking After breaking, the register values input to the tab are automatically overwritten by the specified value. All the commands described on the tabs are tested. Saves all the tab contents to a file. If the ID850QB was activated from a project file, the file is saved as "project-filename.tcl". Clears all the descriptions on the tabs. Specify the program register and the peripheral I/O registers for the register name. 318 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM APPENDIX A EXPANSION WINDOW Memory Mapped I/O window Data is explicitly read or written at a specified address in this window. When a write is performed in the Memory window, the data is internally read and verified by the ID850QB. In addition, the memory can also be read simply by scrolling in the Memory window. On the Memory Mapped I/O window, however, the above operations are not performed. Therefore, this window is useful for reading or writing a specific address. While the user program is being executed, it momentarily breaks before data is written in this window. Figure A-5 Memory Mapped I/O window Object Address Input the address to display. The display target address changes by pressing the Enter key or clicking the User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Function 319 APPENDIX A EXPANSION WINDOW Memory Mapped I/O dialog box This dialog box can be opened by clicking the Object Address Input the address to be written. The address corresponding to the data for which the cursor is placed in the Memory Mapped I/O window is displayed by default. Input the value to be written. Select the size of the data to be written. The size specified in the Memory Mapped I/O window is selected by default. Data is written to the specified address with the specified size. Closes this dialog box. Value Data Size 320 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Function APPENDIX B N-WIRE CHECKER APPENDIX B N-WIRE CHECKER - Overview - Operation - Explanation of each area and button - Corrective Actions in Case of NG - Restrictions B. 1 Overview N-Wire Checker is an application for simply testing the PC connected N-Wire emulator and the target CPU operation. N-Wire Checker is installed at the same time as the debugger. Figure B-1 N-Wire Checker User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 321 APPENDIX B N-WIRE CHECKER B. 1. 1 Kind of test The following tests are possible with N-Wire Checker. (1) N-Wire Emulator test Checks N-Wire emulator connection, initialization, and target CPU register read/write. The test results can be output to the log viewer and a log file. (2) DCK wave form test Outputs the data set from the N-Wire emulator to DDI signal in order to check the waveform of the DCK signal on the target board with an oscilloscope. B. 2 Operation (1) Starting and preparation N-Wire Checker 1) A N-Wire emulator and a target board are turned on. Please refer to the user's manual of each N-Wire emulator about connection of a N-Wire emulator, a target board, and a host machine. 2) Select [Start] menu -> [Program] -> [NEC Tools32] -> [N-Wire Checker]. This starts N-Wire Checker. If, at this time, the debugger is already started up, end it. 3) 4) 5) Click the 322 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM APPENDIX B N-WIRE CHECKER (3) DCK waveform test 1) Connect the DCK signal of the target board to the oscilloscope probe. Switch off the power supply of the N-wire emulator and target board before performing this connection. 2) Input 4-byte data (0xcccccccc at the time of shipping) in the DDI output signal for oscilloscope area and then click the Caution VOH, VOH : Refer to the data sheet supplied with the emulator. Caution The data is output from the lowermost bit. -In the IE-70000-MC-NW-A If data from the target board changes, the changed data is subsequently output because data is shifted via the target board. -In the N-Wire CARD Even if data from the target board changes, the same data is always output because data is shifted inside the emulator. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM VOH VOL 323 APPENDIX B N-WIRE CHECKER B. 3 Explanation of each area and button (1) device file (operating environment setting area) Object Function Displays the dialog box for specifying the device file name of the target CPU. Displays the device file name of the target CPU and its path. Specify this at N-Wire Checker startup. (2) Emulator (emulator selecting area) Object IE-70000-MC-NW-A IE-V850E1-CD-NW Function Select this to connect IE-70000-MC-NW-A. Select this to connect N-Wire CARD. (3) Clock (frequency of the main clock setting area) Object Main OSC (MH ) Function Input the frequency of the main clock input to the device. (4) Internal ROM Security (ID code specification area) Object ID Code Input area (5) N-Wire emulator test (N-Wire emulator test area) Object 324 Function Check the check box when a product with security unit is used in the single-chip mode. Input an ID code when a product with security unit is used in the single-chip mode. For details of the ID code, refer to the "N-Wire CARD User's Manual". Function Tests Connect, DCR Reg, and CPU Reg in sequence. Pauses the test. (Testing resumes when this button is clicked again.) Stops the test. Opens communication with the target and executes testing for initialization. Performs testing for DCU register read/write. Performs testing for CPU register read/write. A test result is displayed. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM APPENDIX B N-WIRE CHECKER (6) DCK wave form test (DCK waveform test area) Object DDI output signal for ocsilloscopearea Function Sets the data of the DDI signal output from the N-Wire emulator. When a value of 0xffffffff or greater is set, an error occurs when the (7) Log viewer area Object Function Displays the dialog box for specifying the test result log file name. (Window\TEMP\IENWULT.log at the time of shipping) The log file is overwritten when N-Wire Checker is started up. The following occurs when the file path name is not specified. - When environment variable TEMP is not defined -> A log file is created under environment variable TMP. - When environment variable TMP is not defined -> A log file is created in the current folder. Displays the log file name and its path. Clears the log viewer display. If a log file name is specified in the log file text area, the log file contents are not cleared. Displays the test results as a log (up to approx. 21,000 characters). The same contents are output to the log file specified in the log file text area. Text area Log viewer area (8) Other Object Function User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 325 APPENDIX B N-WIRE CHECKER B. 4 B. 4. 1 Corrective Actions in Case of NG NG in N-Wire Emulator test (1) If [Connect] is NG Take action to correct the error by referring to next table. Table B-1 Errors of N-Wire Checker Error Number 0x0100 0x0c43 Error Messages Can not communicate with ICE. Connection of emulator cannot be performed. Please confirm the installation of the device driver for the PC interface board. In the IE-70000-MC-NW-A Check the power to the in-circuit emulator. Or, the PC-IF cable may not be correctly connected. Check the connection. In the N-Wire CARD The switch setting may be wrong if a desktop computer is used and two or more PC cards are inserted. Check the setting. Or it may have malfunctioned. Check the target power supply. Check the cable connecting the incircuit emulator and target board. Check that the VDD signal is input to the connector of the target board. Check the power to the chip. Check the connection of the signal lines (DCK, DMS, DDI, DDO, and DRSTZ). Check the noise level by a DCK waveform test. The necessary file may be damaged. Reinstall the device file. Check the clock signal. This may be caused by a stopped clock or a slow clock. Check the clock signal. This may be caused by a stopped clock or a slow clock. Check the noise level by a DCK waveform test. The problem may also be caused by an internal chip problem. Check the noise level by a DCK waveform test. The problem may also be caused by an internal chip problem. Check the noise level by a DCK waveform test. The problem may also be caused by an internal chip problem. This may be caused by the following (when the N-Wire CARD is connected). - The ID code is incorrect. -> Input the correct ID code. - The internal flash memory is in the write mode because the FLMD0 pin is high. -> Make the FLMD0 pin low. - The emulator connection prohibition mode is set because the ID code (bit 7 of address 0x79) is 0. ->Erase the internal flash memory once. 0x03a0 Power supply of target is OFF. DCU cannot be accessed. 0x0c70 0x0105 0x0c71 0x0c24 0x0c72 0x0c73 0x0c74 0xf603 Failed in reading device file (dxxxx.800). Reset cannot be performed. It cannot shift to debug mode. Monitor memory cannot be accessed. Monitor execution cannot be performed. CPU register cannot be accessed. Incorrect ID Code. 326 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Corrective Action APPENDIX B N-WIRE CHECKER Table B-1 Errors of N-Wire Checker Error Number 0xf604 Error Messages Incorrect ID Code. Abort the N-Wire checker. This may be caused by the following (when the N-Wire CARD is connected). - The ID code is incorrect. -> Input the correct ID code. - The internal flash memory is in the write mode because the FLMD0 pin is high. -> Make the FLMD0 pin low. - The emulator connection prohibition mode is set because the ID code (bit 7 of address 0x79) is 0. ->Erase the internal flash memory once. (2) If [DCU reg] is NG Normal access to the DCU register seems impossible. Perform the DCK waveform test. If no anomaly is found with the DCK waveform test, the register may be damaged, so try again with a different chip . (3) If [CPU reg] is NG Normal access to the CPU register seems impossible. Perform the DCK waveform test. If no anomaly is found with the DCK waveform test, the register may be damaged, so try again with a different chip . B. 4. 2 NG in DCK waveform test Check the following items regarding the design of the target board, in accordance with the User's Manual of the N-Wire emulator. (1) IE-70000-MC-NW-A - Is the pattern of the N-Wire interface signal 100 mm or less? - Is the DCK signal shielded through a 4.7 k Ohm pull-up resistor + GND? - Is a 4.7 k Ohm pull-up resistor connected to the DMS signal and the DDI signal? - Is a 22 Ohm damping resistor connected to the DDO signal? - Is a 50 k Ohm pull-down resistor connected to the DRSTZ signal? (2) N-Wire CARD - Is the pattern of the N-Wire interface signal 100 mm or less? - Is the DCK signal shielded through a pull-up resistor* + GND? - Is a pull-up resistor* connected to the DMS, DDI, and DDO signals? - Is a damping resistor* connected to the DDO signal? - Is a pull-down resistor* connected to the _DRSTZ signal (or DRST signal)? User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Corrective Action 327 APPENDIX B N-WIRE CHECKER Caution The resistance of the resistor marked * above must be as specified for each device. Some devices have on-chip pull-up/down resistors. With these devices, an external resistor is not necessary. Also check the following items regarding the power supply capacity of the target board. - Is a power supply with a sufficient capacity used? - Are sufficient capacitors provided on the target board? - Is a bypass capacitor connected to all the power supply pins of the CPU? - Is the GND plane on the target board sufficiently large? B. 5 Restrictions Up to 21000 characters can be displayed in the log view area. If this is exceeded, the displayed information is overwritten starting from the oldest data. if the system resources are running extremely short, the N-Wire Checker stops output to the log view area. For accurate information, therefore, use the log file. Information is continuously recorded in the log file even while screen output is stopped. The log file is overwritten once when the N-Wire checker is started. 328 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM APPENDIX C INPUT CONVENTIONS APPENDIX C INPUT CONVENTIONS - Usable Character Set - Symbols - Numeric Values - Expressions and Operators C. 1 Usable Character Set Table C-1 List of Character Set Classification Alphabetic characters Numerals Character equivalent to alphabetic character Uppercase : A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Lowercase : a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0123456789 @_ Character ( ) + * / % Name Left parenthesis Right parenthesis Plus Minus Asterisk Slash Percent Tilde Vertical line Circumflex Ampersand Left bracket Right bracket Period Comma Changes operation order. Changes operation order. Addition operator or positive sign Subtraction operator or negative sign Multiplication operator or indirect reference operator Division operator Remainder operator Complement operator Bit sum operator Bit difference operator Bit product operator or address operator Array subscript operator or base register specification symbol | ^ & [ ] . , Direct member operator or bit position specifier Delimiter between operands User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Table C-2 List of Special Characters Usage Character 329 APPENDIX C INPUT CONVENTIONS C. 2 Symbols (a) A symbol consists of characters A to Z, a to z, @, _ (underbar), . (period) and 0 to 9. (b) A symbol must start with a character other than numerals 0 to 9. (c) Uppercase characters (A to Z) and lowercase characters (a to z) are distinguished. (d) A symbol must be no more than 2048 characters long (if a symbol of more than 2048 characters is defined, only the first 2048 characters are valid). (e) A symbol is defined by loading a load module file. (f) Symbols are classified into the following types by the valid range: - Global symbol (assembly language, C language) - Static symbol (C language) In-file static symbol In-function static symbol - Local symbol (C language) In-file local symbol In-function local symbol In-block local symbol (g) The following symbols are available for each language used: - Assembly language Label name -C language Variable name (including pointer variable name, enumeration type variable name, array name, structure name, and union name) Function name, label name Array element, structure element, union element, bit field (if the symbol is an array, structure, or union) (h) A symbol can be described instead of an address or numeric value. (i) The valid range of a symbol is determined based on the source debug information when the source file is assembled or compiled. (j) (k) Describe only the symbol name of a global symbol. A local symbol is expressed in pairs with a file name. 330 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM APPENDIX C INPUT CONVENTIONS C. 3 Numeric Values The following four types of numeric values can be used. The input format of each type is as shown below. The suffix (bold) and the alphabetic characters of hexadecimal numbers may be uppercase or lowercase characters. If the first character is A to F, 0 must be prefixed to it. In the input field of ID850QB, decimal numbers or hexadecimal numbers are alternately selected, depending on the default radix. Numeric Value Binary number Octal number nY n...nY (n=0,1) nO n...nO (n=0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7) nQ n...nQ (n=0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7) Decimal number n n...n nT n...nT (n=0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9) n n...n nH n...nH 0xn 0xn...n (n=0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,A,B,C,D,E,F) Hexadecimal numbers C. 4 Expressions and Operators (1) Expressions An expression consists of constants, register names, IOR names, and symbols coupled by operators. If IOR name, label name, function name, or variable name is described as a symbol, an address is calculated as the value of the symbol. The elements making up an expression, except operators, are called terms (constants and labels). Terms are called the first term, the second term, and so on, starting from the left. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Table C-3 Input Format of Numeric Values Input Format 331 APPENDIX C INPUT CONVENTIONS (2) Operators The following operators of the C language can be used: Symbol Arithmetic operator + * / MOD % - sign + sign Logical operator NOT ~ AND & OR | XOR ^ Shift operator SHR >> SHL << Meaning Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Remainder Unary operator (negative) Unary operator (positive) Returns the sum of the first and second terms. Returns the difference between the first and second terms. Returns the product of the first and second terms. Divides the value of the first term by the value of the second term, and returns the integer of the result. Divides the value of the first term by the value of the second term, and returns the remainder of the result. Returns 2's complement of the value of the term. Returns the value of the term. Negation Logical product Logical sum Exclusive logical sum Logically negates each bit of the term, and returns the result. Obtains the logical product of the values of the first and second terms on each bit, and returns the result. Obtains the logical sum of the values of the first and second terms on each bit, and returns the result. Obtains the exclusive logical sum of the values of the first and second terms on each bit, and returns the result. Right shift Shifts the value of the first term by the value (number of bits) of the second term to the right, and returns the result. As many 0s as the number of shifted bits are inserted in the higher bits. Shifts the value of the first term by the value (number of bits) of the second term to the left, and returns the result. As many 0s as the number of shifted bits are inserted in the lower bits. Left shift Byte separation operator HIGH LOW Higher byte Lower byte Of the lowest 16 bits of the term, returns the higher 8 bits. Of the lowest 16 bits of the term, returns the lower 8 bits. Word separation operator HIGHW LOWW Higher word Lower word Of the 32 bits of the term, returns the higher 16 bits. Of the 32 bits of the term, returns the lower 16 bits. 332 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Table C-4 List of Operators Explanation APPENDIX C INPUT CONVENTIONS Symbol Other ( ) Meaning Left parenthesis Right parenthesis Performs the operation in ( ) before the operation outside ( ). '(' and ')' are always used in pairs. (3) Rules of operation Operations are performed according to the priority of the operators. Table C-5 Operator Priority Priority 1 2 3 4 5 6 Lower Higher (,) + sign, - sign, NOT, ~, HIGHT, LOW, HIGHW, LOWW *, /, MOD, %, SHR, >>, SHL, << +, AND, & OR, |, XOR, ^ - If the priorities of the operators are the same, the operation is performed from the left toward the right. - Performs the operation in ( ) before the operation outside ( ). - Each term in an operation is treated as unsigned 32-bit data. - All operation results are treated as unsigned 32-bit data. - If an overflow occurs during operation, the lower 32 bits are valid, and the overflow is not detected. (4) Terms To describe a constant for a term, the following numeric values can be described. Table C-6 Range of Radixes Radix Binary number Octal number Decimal number Hexadecimal numbers 0Y <= value <= 1111111111111111111111111111111Y (32 digits) 0O <= value <= 37777777777O -2147483648 <= value <= 4294967295 (A negative decimal number is internally converted into a 2's complement.) 0H <= value <= 0FFFFFFFH User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Table C-4 List of Operators Explanation Operators Range 333 APPENDIX D KEY FUNCTION LIST APPENDIX D KEY FUNCTION LIST Key BackSpace Deletes one character before the cursor and moves the cursor to the position of the deleted character. At this time, the character string following the cursor moves forward. - Deletes one character after the cursor and move the character string following the cursor forward. - Deletes a various event condition selected in the Event Manager or each event dialog box. - Deletes the data selected in the Watch window. Alternately selects the insert mode and overwrite mode in the Source window and Assemble window. However, this key is invalid in the Memory, Register, and IOR windows, and only the overwrite mode can be used as an input mode. Loads the entire display screen to the clipboard as a bitmap image (function of Windows). - Closes the pull-down menu. - Closes the modal dialog box. - Restores the input data. Moves the cursor to the menu bar. Moves the cursor to the end of the line. Moves the cursor to the beginning of the line. Scrolls the screen one screen up. The cursor also moves up to the top of the screen. Scrolls the screen one screen down. The cursor also moves up to the top of the screen. Inserts one blank character. Moves the cursor to the next item. Moves the cursor up. If the cursor is at the bottom of the screen, scrolls the screen up one line at a time. Moves the cursor down. If the cursor is at the top of the screen, scrolls the screen down one line at a time. Moves the cursor to the left. If the cursor is at the left most position on the screen, scrolls the screen one column to the right. Moves the cursor to the right. If the cursor is at the right most position on the screen, scrolls the screen one column to the left. - Sets the input data. - Presses the default push button. Opens the Help window. Forcibly stops program execution. Same function as [Run] menu -> [Stop]. Resets the CPU. Same function as [Run] menu -> [CPU Reset]. Delete Insert PrintScreen Esc Alt End Home PageUp PageDown Space Tab Up arrow key Down arrow key Right arrow key Left arrow key Enter F1 F2 F3 334 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Table D-1 Key Function List Function APPENDIX D KEY FUNCTION LIST Key F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 Shift+End Shift+Home Shift+Left arrow key Shift+Right arrow key Shift+F6 Shift+F9 Ctrl+End Ctrl+Home Ctrl+Left arrow key Ctrl+Right arrow key Ctrl+F5 Ctrl+F9 Ctrl+A Ctrl+C Ctrl+D Resets the CPU and executes the program. Same function as [Run] menu -> [Restart]. Executes the program. Same function as [Run] menu -> [Go]. Executes the program to the cursor position in the Source or Assemble window. Same function as [Run] menu -> [Come Here]. The user program is real-time executed until execution returns. Same function as [Run] menu -> [Return Out]. Step execution. Same function as [Run] menu -> [Step In]. Sets a breakpoint at cursor position in Source or Assemble window. Same function as [Run] menu -> [Break Point]. Next step execution. Same function as [Run] menu -> [Next Over]. Sets or deletes a software breakpoint. Same function as [Run] menu -> [Software Break Point]. Expands the selection range to the end of the line. Expands the selection range to the beginning of the line. Expands the selection range one character to the left. Expands the selection range one character to the right. Executes the program from the cursor position in the Source or Assemble window. Same function as [Run] menu -> [Start From Here]. Resets the CPU. Same function as [Run] menu -> [CPU Reset]. Displays the last line. The cursor will also move to the last line. Displays the first line. The cursor will also move to the first line. Moves the cursor one word to the left. If the cursor at the left most position on the screen, scrolls the screen one column to the right. Moves the cursor one word to the right. If the cursor at the right most position on the screen, scrolls the screen one column to the left. Ignores break points being set, and executes the program. Same function as [Run] menu -> [Ignore break points and Go]. Sets the address at the cursor position in the Source window or Assemble window to the PC. Same function as [Run] menu -> [Change PC]. Selects all the events registered to the Event Manager. Same function as [View] menu -> [Select All Event] in the Event Manager. Copies a selected character string and saves it to the clipboard buffer. Disassembles and displays the results from the jump destination address specified by the data value selected in the current window.Opens the Assemble window. Same function as [Jump] menu -> [Assemble]. Opens the source file displayed in the active Source window with the editor specified by the PM plus when the PM plus is running. Same function as [Edit] menu -> [Edit Source]. Ctrl+E User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Table D-1 Key Function List Function 335 APPENDIX D KEY FUNCTION LIST Key Ctrl+G Ctrl+J Ctrl+M Performs a search.Opens the search dialog box corresponding to the current window. Same function as [View] menu -> [Search...]. Moves the display position. Opens the each dialog box, depending on the current window. Same function as [View] menu -> [Move...]. Displays the memory contents from the jump destination address specified by the data value selected in the current window. Opens the Memory window. Same function as [Jump] menu -> [Memory...]. Loads a view file, source file, or text file. Opens the View File Load dialog box. The operation will differ depending on the extension of the file. view file: Displays the file in the corresponding window. Others: Displays the file in the Source window. Same function as [File] menu -> [Open...]. Saves the data displayed in the current window to the view file. Same function as [View] menu -> [Save...]. Displays the corresponding source text and source line, using the data value selected in the current window as the jump destination address. Opens the Source window. Same function as [Jump] menu -> [Source Text]. Pastes the contents of the clipboard buffer to the text cursor position. Temporarily displays the contents of the specified data. Opens the Quick Watch dialog box. Same function as [View] menu -> [Quick Watch...]. Cuts a selected character string and saves it to the clipboard buffer. Same function as [Edit] menu -> [Cut]. Expands the selection range one word to the left. Expands the selection range one word to the right. Ctrl+O Ctrl+S Ctrl+U Ctrl+V Ctrl+W Ctrl+X Ctrl+Shift+Left arrow key Ctrl+Shift+Rig ht arrow key 336 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Table D-1 Key Function List Function APPENDIX E MESSAGES APPENDIX E MESSAGES - Display Format - Types of Messages - Message Lists E. 1 Display Format Messages are output to the error/warning dialog box. By pressing the F1 key while the error/warning dialog box is open, the related online help files are displayed. Figure E-1 Error/Warning Messages E. 2 Types of Messages The ID850QB outputs the following types of messages. Table E-1 Types of Messages Type Axxxx Fatal error messages Stops processing, and terminates the debugger. If this error occurs, debugging cannot be continued. Syntax error messages Stops processing, and opened windows and dialog boxes are closed. Warning messages or question messages Stops processing, but opened windows and dialog boxes are not closed. Fxxxx Wxxxx User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM Meaning 337 APPENDIX E MESSAGES E. 3 Message Lists < X0000~ > < X1000~ > < X2000~ > < X3000~ > < X4000~ > < X5000~ > < X6000~ > < X7000~ > < X8000~ > < X9000~ > < Xa000~ > < Xb000~ > < Xc000~ > (1) X0000~ F0002: This feature is not supported. F0100 : Can not communicate with ICE. Please confirm the installation of the device driver for the PC interface board. 1) The driver may not be correctly installed. Reinstall the driver. A0101: Can not find initialization file (expc.ini). A0102: Host name not found. F0103: Data transfer to ICE is timed out. Please confirm the power of ICE, connection of the interface cable, or I/O address of the PC interface board. F0104: Data receive from ICE is timed out. Please confirm the power of ICE, connection of the interface cable, or I/O address of the PC interface board. A0105: Failed in reading device file (d3xxx.800). 1) Necessary files may be damaged. Reinstall the device file. A0106: Illegal data received. 1) Check the power of the in-circuit emulator, cable connections, and setting of the interface board and restart the debugger. A0107: Can not communicate with ICE. A0108: Failed in reading initialization file (expc.ini). A0109: Can not communicate with ICE. Please terminate the debugger and check the power of ICE or the connection of cable then restart the debugger. F010a: Can not communicate. Please confirm the availability of the communication port. A01a0: No response from the evachip. Please confirm the signal of the CLOCK or RESET WAIT, HLDRQ and so on.(IECUBE) No response from the CPU. Please confirm the signal of the CLOCK or RESET WAIT, HLDRQ and so on.(N-Wire CARD) No response from the emulation CPU. Please confirm the signal of the CLOCK or RESET,WAIT and so on.(78K0) 1) Check the HOLD signal, WAIT signal, clock signal, etc. The IOR value may not be correct. A01a1: Failed in reading ie703000.ie. A01a2: Break board is not connected. A01a3: Emulation board is not connected. A01a4: Board configuration of ICE is not consistent. A01a5: POD/EM1 board is not connected. 338 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM APPENDIX E MESSAGES A01a6: Executor is running. A01a7: Failed in reading micro program file (m0xxx.78k). A01a8: Failed in reading initialization file (expc.ini).(78K) Failed to find configuration file (lv8hw.ini). (V850) A01ad: Please update the device driver for the PC interface board. 1) The device driver may be old. Install the latest device driver. A01ae: Failed in reading initialization file (expc.ini).(78K) Failed in reading configuration file (lv8hw.ini). (V850) A01af: Failed in executing monitor command. A01b0: Can not communicate with monitor program. Please check the availability of communication port, the setting of CPU board or the type of cable. A01b1: Can not communicate with monitor program. Please terminate the debugger and check the power of CPU board or the connection of cable then restart the debugger. A01d0: Not enough memory in starting simulator. A01d1: Not enough memory in starting simulator. F0200: Verification error occurred. Failed in writing memory. 1) External memory could not be accessed, as it is not set. Change the register values necessary for accessing the external memory using the IOR window or Hook Procedure before download. F02a0: Bus hold error. 1) CPU is in the bus-hold status. Reset the debugger. F02a2: Can not compulsory break. F02a3: Reset under continuation. F02d2: Not enough memory for trace-buffer. F0300: User program is running. F0301: User program is being breaked. F0302: User program is being traced. F0303: Not traced. F0304: Trace memory is not set. F0306: No trace block exists. F0307: No event condition exists. F0308: No timer measurement is done. F0309: No trigger frame exists. F030a: Tracer is being stopped. F030b: Specified snap-event has not been registered. F030c: Specified stub-event has not been registered. F030d: Timer is running. F030e: Memory copy area is overlapped. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 339 APPENDIX E MESSAGES F030f: Trace has been already set. F0310: Event condition is not set. F0311: Too many valid timer event conditions. F0312: Specified timer event is not set. F0313: Illegal map range. 1) Check the map range in the Configuration dialog box. When mapping to external memory has been performed, change the register values necessary for accessing the external memory using the IOR window or Hook Procedure before download). F0314: Only trace delay mode can set with delay trigger. F0315: Delay trigger cannot set without trace delay mode. F03a0: Target is not turned on. 1) Check the target power supply. Check the cable connecting the in-circuit emulator and target board. Check that the VDD signal is input to the connector of the target board. F03a1: Step execution is being done. F03a2: Timer and Tracer are running. F03a3: Event link and BRS events are mixed. F03d0: Back-trace is being executed. F03d1: Back-trace is being stopped. F03d2: Back-trace execution point overrun oldest frame. F03d3: Register status or Memory status cannot be set up other than Phase1 of event link. F03d4: No back-trace information exists. F03d5: Last command can not be backstepped. F0400: Illegal condition. 1) Settings of the used in-circuit emulator and those of the Configuration dialog box may not match. Check the Chip selection. F0401: Result of timer measurement overflowed. F0402: Too many event conditions with path count. F0403: Too many address range conditions. F0404: Too many simultaneously-usable-event conditions. F0405: Too many snap-events. F0406: Too many stub-events. F0407: Too many initialization data. F0408: Too large search data (> 16 byte). F0409: Too large search data (> search range). F040a: Too many Linking-event conditions. F04a0: Software break conditions number overflow. F04a1: Not enough memory for emulation. 340 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM APPENDIX E MESSAGES F04a2: Too many partition of bus size. F04a3: Too many execution-event conditions. F04a4: Too many bus-event conditions. A0600: Not enough memory for buffer. 1) There is not enough system memory. Close the applications being executed and the open files. A0601: Not enough resource of operating system. F0b61: Section Trace event conditions overflow. F0c00: Monitor file read error. 1) Necessary files may be damaged. Reinstall the debugger. A0c01: During access of register, CPU did time out. 1) Check the clock signal, etc. The register value may not be correct. A0c02: During access of memory, CPU did time out. 1) Check the HOLD signal, WAIT signal, clock signal, etc. The memory value may not be correct. A0c03: During access of I/O register, CPU did time out. 1) Check the HOLD signal, WAIT signal, clock signal, etc. The IOR value may not be correct. F0c20: Guarded area can not be accessed. F0c21: Memory was unready status. F0c22: Memory unready status was canceled. F0c23: Bus hold under continuation. 1) Check the setting of the target board, or mask the HOLD pin. F0c24: It cannot shift to debug mode. 1) Check the clock signal. This may be caused by a stopped clock or a slow clock. F0c25: Flash macro service ROM was accessed or stepped in. 1) Please perform [Go] execution or CPU reset. F0c26: FLMD terminal is in a write-protected state. 1) FLMD is not in the write-enabled status. Check the status of the FLMD0 and FLMD1 pins. F0c27: Security flag is in a write-protected state. 1) The security flag of the flash memory has disabled writing, block erasure, or chip erasure. Nothing can be written to the flash memory. F0c28: Internal RAM is not enough, the writing to flash memory is not made. 1) The internal RAM size is less than 4 KB and flash self-programming cannot be executed. F0c29: The blank check of flash memory failed. F0c2a: The erasing of flash memory failed. F0c2b: The writing of flash memory failed. F0c2c: The internal verification of flash memory failed. F0c2d: Failed in writing flash memory. F0c2e: There is no response from flash macro service. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 341 APPENDIX E MESSAGES F0c2f : Response from flash macro service is not right. F0c30: Flash I/O register operation prohibition setup needs to be canceled. F0c31: STOP mode under continuation. Can not compulsory break. Please release STOP mode or reset the CPU. F0c32: Please write in flash memory in the single chip mode 0. F0c40: Status of effective event conditions cannot be changed. F0c41: Coverage test is being executed. F0c42: Monitor has failed in shift in the debugging mode.Please reset the CPU. F0c43: Can not communicate with ICE. (N-Wire CARD) Can not communicate with ICE. Please confirm the power of ICE, connection of the interface cable. (IECUBE) 1) The switch setting may be wrong if a desktop computer is used and two or more PC cards are inserted. Check the setting. Or it may have malfunctioned (when the N-Wire CARD is connected). 2) Check the power to the in-circuit emulator and cable connections The switch setting may be wrong if a desktop computer is used and two or more PC cards are inserted. Check the setting. may have malfunctioned (when the IECUBE is connected). F0c44: Coverage test is being executed. F0c45: Inside of Power off reset emulation cannot carry out program execution. F0c60: Event before execution cannot be set up other than break conditions. F0c61: Can not register event numbers which can not be used for hardware break. F0c62: Event numbers reserved for hardware breaks can not be used. F0c63: Event link conditions cannot set. F0c64: Too many ROM-emulation-RAM areas. F0c67: Writing of flash memory during block is not made. Or it F0c70: DCU cannot be accessed. 1) The device file selection may be incorrect. Select a device file that supports the target chip in Chip Selection in the Configuration dialog box. Check the power to the chip. Check the connection of the signal lines (DCK, DMS, DDI, DDO, and DRSTZ). Check the noise level by a DCK waveform test on the N-Wire Checker (when the IE-70000-MC-NW-A, N-Wire CARD is connected). 2) IE may be malfunctioning (when the IECUBE is connected). F0c71: Reset cannot be performed. 1) Check the clock signal. This may be caused by a stopped clock or a slow clock. 342 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM APPENDIX E MESSAGES F0c72: Monitor memory cannot be accessed. 1) Revise the Main OSC value in the Configuration dialog box. Check the setting of main clock in the Configuration dialog box , the noise level by a DCK waveform test on the N-Wire Checker. The problem may also be caused by an internal chip problem (when the is N-Wire CARD, IECUBE connected). 2) Revise the Main OSC value in the Configuration dialog box. If this does not solve the problem, IE may be malfunctioning (when the IECUBE is connected). 3) Check the noise level by a DCK waveform test on the N-Wire Checker. The problem may also be caused by an internal chip problem (when the IE-70000-MC-NW-A is connected). F0c73: Monitor execution cannot be performed. 1) Check the noise level by a DCK waveform test on the N-Wire Checker. The problem may also be caused by an internal chip problem (when the IE-70000-MC-NW-A , N-Wire CARD is connected). 2) IE may be malfunctioning (when the IECUBE is connected). F0c74: CPU register cannot be accessed. 1) Check the noise level by a DCK waveform test on the N-Wire Checker. The problem may also be caused by an internal chip problem (when the N-Wire CARD is connected). 2) The device file selection may be incorrect. Select a device file that supports the target chip in Chip Selection in the Configuration dialog box. If this does not solve the problem, the IE may be malfunctioning (when the IECUBE is connected). F0c75 : Monitor has failed in shift in the debugging mode. Please reset the CPU. F0c76 : Initial state at the time of DCU access start is unusual. 1) Initial state at the time of DCU access start is unusual (does not start and remains in the reset state). Check the connection of the signal lines (DCK, DMS, DDI, DDO, and DRSTZ). Check the noise level by a DCK waveform test on the N-Wire Checker (when the N-Wire CARD is connected). 2) The device file selection may be incorrect. Select a device file that supports the target chip in Chip Selection in the Configuration dialog box. If this does not solve the problem, the IE may be malfunctioning (when the IECUBE is connected). F0c77 : DCU access is unusuall. 1) DCU access is unusuall (verify error). Check the connection of the signal lines (DCK, DMS, DDI, DDO, and DRSTZ). Check the noise level by a DCK waveform test on the N-Wire Checker (when the N-Wire CARD is connected). 2) IE may be malfunctioning (when the IECUBE is connected). F0c78: Failed in reading of trace data. F0ca0: Can not communicate with ICE. Please confirm the power of ICE, connection of the interface cable, or I/O address of the PC interface board.(V850) Error occurred inside debugger. (IECUBE) 1) Can not communicate with in-circuit emulator. Check the power of the in-circuit emulator, cable connections, and setting of the interface board etc. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 343 APPENDIX E MESSAGES F0ca1: Monitor file not found. 1) Necessary files may be damaged. Reinstall the debugger. F0ca2: Device file which does not correspond to on tip debug. 1) An attempt was made to start with a device file not supporting on-chip debugging. The device file may be old. Install the latest device file (when the N-Wire CARD is connected). 2) IE may be malfunctioning (when the IECUBE is connected). F0ca3: Information that it does not support is included in on tip debug information on device file. 1) An unknown flag is included in the on-chip debug information of the device file.The exec module may be old. Install the latest exec module. F0ca4 : Device file which does not correspond to IECUBE. 1) An attempt was made to start with a device file not supporting IECUBE. The device file may be old. Install the latest device file (when the IECUBE is connected). F0caf: Trace block can not be stepped over. (2) X1000~ A1000: Failed in initializing ICE. A1001: No entry exists for specified number. A1002: Can not relocate internal RAM. F1003: Illegal relocation address. F1004: Illegal condition. A1005: Invalid attribute. F1006: Illegal address. A1007: Not enough memory on ICE. A1008: Not enough memory for tables. 1) There is not enough system memory. Close the applications being executed and the open files. A1009: Already initialized. A100a: Not initialized. F100b: User program is running. F100c: Different bus size has been already specified. F100d: Too large bus size. F100e: Too large bus partition size. W100f: Target is not turned on. F1010: Illegal map range. F1011: Failed in setting internal ROM and RAM. F1012: This feature is not supported. F1013: No terminal name. W1014: Data is not exist. 344 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM APPENDIX E MESSAGES A1015: Programmable-IOR does not exist. F1016: Programmable-IOR does not movable. 1) Necessary files may be damaged. Reinstall the latest device file. F1017: I/O Protect mapping is possible a target attribute only. F1018: Illegal Internal ROM size. F1019: Illegal Internal ROM size or Internal RAM size. A10ff: Can not communicate with ICE. A1dbe: Error occurred inside debugger. (3) X2000~ F2000: Illegal IOR name. A2001: Illegal address. F2002: User program is running. F2003: Illegal IOR number. F2004: Illegal bit number. W2005: IOR of Read Protect attribute was specified. F2006: Hidden IOR was specified. F2007: IOR of ban read or write was specified. F2008: IOR not existing was specified. A2009: Device file is damaged or error is in file. F200a: Illegal value specified for IOR. A200b: Can not copy. A200c: Not enough memory. 1) There is not enough system memory. Close the applications being executed and the open files. W200d: No initialize data for IOR. F200e: IOR area can not be accessed. A20ff: Can not communicate with ICE. A2222: Illegal condition. (4) X3000~ F3000: No mapped address was accessed. 1) The allocation addresses of the program and the addresses of the debugger may not match. Set the mapping to the external memory in the Configuration dialog box according to the allocation addresses specified in the link directive file on compilation. When mapping to external memory has been executed, change the register values necessary for accessing the external memory using the IOR window or Hook Procedure before download. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 345 APPENDIX E MESSAGES F3001: Memory has different value. F3002: Illegal start address. F3003: Illegal end address F3004: Illegal start address and end address. F3005: Illegal condition. F3006: User program is running. F3007: Verification error. F3008: No condition specified. F3009: Parameter size does not align with access size alignment. F300a: Specified address does not align with access size alignment. F300b: Source address does not align with access size alignment. F300c: Destination address does not align with access size alignment. F300d: Illegal end address. F300e: Different access size in specified area. F300f: Different access size both in source and destination areas. F3010: Different access size in destination area. F3011: Different access size, source & destination. A3012: Not enough memory. 1) There is not enough system memory. Close the applications being executed and the open files. F3013: Failed in writing DMM. F3014: Oveflowed mapping area. F3015: Processing was interrupted. F3016: This feature is not supported. A30ff: Can not communicate with ICE. (5) X4000~ F4000: Can not delete specified event. 1) The specified event cannot be deleted as it is being used under another condition. Invalidate it for other usages before deleting. F4001: Illegal table number. F4002: Illegal start address. F4003: Illegal end address. F4004: Illegal status. F4005: Illegal data. F4006: Specified event number has been already used. F4007: Too many same events are registered. 346 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM APPENDIX E MESSAGES F4008: Specified event has not been registered. F4009: Illegal data size. F400a: Illegal mode. F400b: Setting value is inaccurate. F400c: Event link conditions cannot be used for section trace conditions. F400d: Too many identical events are registered (>= 32767). F400e: Specified event condition does not exist. F400f: Illegal event link condition. F4010: Function not found. A4011: Not enough memory. 1) There is not enough system memory. Close the applications being executed and the open files. F4012: Timer is being disabled. W4013: Access size is different from its mapped bus size. F4014: Can not use software break. F4015: Can not use event condition specifying address range. F4016: Can not change event condition. F4017: Can not access word at odd address. A4018: Not enough memory. 1) There is not enough system memory. Close the applications being executed and the open files. F4019: This feature is not supported. F401a: No Event. F401b: Can not use tag-event. W401c: Software break can not be set on this area. F401d: Start event and end event of timer are not made to the same setup. F401e: Too many trace-events. F401f: Path count cannot be set up. F4020: Address range cannot be set up in event before execution. F4021: Event conditions number overflow. F4022: Software DMM conditions number overflow. F4023: Real-time call conditions number overflow. F4024: Software break call conditions number overflow. F4025: Illegal snap condition. F4026: Too many event conditions cannot be set as Phase1 and Phase2 of event link conditions. F4027: Software break conditions number which can be set as internal ROM was overflow. F4318: Illegal memory bank setting. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 347 APPENDIX E MESSAGES (6) X5000~ A5000: Illegal device file type. A5001: Not enough memory. 1) There is not enough system memory. Close the applications being executed and the open files. A5002: Can not open device file. A5003: Reading of device file went wrong. A5004: Can not close device file. A5005: Illegal device file format. 1) Necessary files may be damaged. Reinstall the device file. A5006: Failed in initializing ICE. A5007: Device file has broken or error is in a file. F5008: Can not open device file. 1) Necessary files may be damaged. Reinstall the device file. F5009: Can not open ie703000.ie. F500a: Specified device file is illegal version. 1) Necessary files may be damaged. Reinstall the device file. W500b: Specified device file does not relocate IRAM. A500c: Failed in reading expc.ini. A500d: Not enough memory. 1) There is not enough system memory. Close the applications being executed and the open files. W500e: No tag data which it was going to refer to device file. A5300: Illegal device file type. A5301: Not enough memory. 1) There is not enough system memory. Close the applications being executed and the open files. A5302: Can not open database file. 1) Necessary files may be damaged. Reinstall the debugger and device file. A5303: Reading of database file went wrong. A5304: Can not close database file. A5305: Illegal database file format. 1) Necessary files may be damaged. Reinstall the debugger, and device file. A5306: Database information has been already initialized. A5307: Database information does not exist. F5308: Can not open specified database file. 1) Necessary files may be damaged. Reinstall the debugger. F5309: Specified database file is illegal version. 1) Necessary files may be damaged. Reinstall the debugger, and the device file. 348 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM APPENDIX E MESSAGES (7) X6000~ F6000: Current function does not exist. F6001: Illegal symbol name. F6002: Illegal condition. F6003: Illegal function name. F6004: Overflowed output buffer size. F6005: Illegal expression. (8) X7000~ F7000: Illegal mode. F7001: User program is running. F7002: User program has been stopped. F7003: Trace enabled. F7004: Trace memory is not set. F7005: Function return address does not exist, can not do step execution. W7010: No source information exists. W7011: Unknown result of step execution. A7012: Not enough memory. 1) There is not enough system memory. Close the applications being executed and the open files. A70fe: Bus hold error. 1) CPU is in the bus-hold status. Reset the debugger. A70ff: Can not communicate with ICE. F7801: End waiting state of step execution was canceled. F7802: End waiting state of step execution was canceled. F7f00: Aborted step execution. F7f02: Suspended step execution. A7f03: Failed in canceling RUN/STEP. F7f04: Can not execute non-mapped area. F7f05: This feature is not supported. (9) X8000~ F8000: Specified file was not found. F8001: Illegal line number. F8002: Current information is not set. F8003: Illegal address. F8004: This feature is not supported. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 349 APPENDIX E MESSAGES (10) X9000~ A9000: Specified register symbol does not exist. A9001: Specified register symbol ID does not exist. F9002: Illegal value. A9003: Illegal condition. A9004: Too large register size. F9005: This feature is not supported. (11) Xa000~ Fa001: Illegal expression. Fa002: Start address is bigger than the end address. Fa003: Illegal source path. Fa004: Too long expression. Aa005: Not enough memory. 1) There is not enough system memory. Close the applications being executed and the open files. Fa006: Illegal argument. Fa007: Illegal program number. Fa008: Source path is not set. Fa009: File not found. Fa00a: Can not open file. 1) The file is damaged or does not exist. Recreate the file. Aa00b: Can not close file. Aa00c: Failed in reading file. 1) The file is damaged or does not exist. Recreate the file. Fa00d: Not source file of load module. Fa00e: Illegal line number. Fa00f: Variable does not exist. Aa010: Can not communicate with ICE. Fa011: Can not access register. Fa012: Can not access memory. Aa013: Reading of file went wrong. Fa014: It was going to open the binary file. Fa015: Can not get temporary path. 1) The disk is full. Delete or move unnecessary files and increase the available memory in the disk. Fa016: Can not create temporary file. 1) The disk is full. Delete or move unnecessary files and increase the available memory in the disk. 350 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM APPENDIX E MESSAGES Fa017: Can not remove temporary file. Fa020: This feature is not supported. Fa021: Symbol assigned to register cannot be specified. (12) Xb000~ Fb000: Illegal command line. Fb001: Program information does not exist in specified load module file. Fb002: File not found. Fb003: Function not found. Fb004: Selected load module different from kind (Chip) was loaded. Fb005: Symbol not found. 1) The address could not be found. Specify a location holding address information. Fb008: Illegal expression. Ab009: Not enough memory. 1) There is not enough system memory. Close the applications being executed and the open files. Fb00a: Illegal symbol in load module file. Fb00b: Current program does not exist. Fb00c: Current file does not exist. Ab00d: Current function does not exist. Ab00e: Current line does not exist. Ab00f: Tag not found. Ab010: Failed in loading symbol table. Ab011: Illegal line number. Fb012: Too large line number. Ab015: Reading of file went wrong. 1) The file is damaged or does not exist. Recreate the file. Ab016: Can not open file. 1) The file is damaged or does not exist. Recreate the file. Ab017: Failed in writing file. 1) The file is damaged or does not exist. Recreate the file. Ab019: Reading of file went wrong. Ab01a: Can not close file. Fb01b: Too long load module file name. Ab01c: Too many entries of the task kind. Fb01d: Address not found. Wb01e: No debug information (not compiled in Debug Build mode). User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 351 APPENDIX E MESSAGES Fb01f: Can not find structure member. Fb020: Can not find value. Fb021: No debug information exists in load module file. 1) To create a load module with appended debug information, execute build in build mode of Debug Build. Fb022: Illegal line number. Ab023: Current stack frame is not active. Ab024: Different section. Fb026: Too many array dimensions (> 4). Fb027: Found end of file. 1) The specified file may be damaged. Recreate the file. Fb028: This feature is not supported. Fb029: Illegal address. Ab02a: Can not communicate with ICE. Fb02b: Can not stack trace with current PC value. Fb02c: Too many blocks for one function. Fb02d: Illegal argument. Fb02e: The file does not exist in the SOURCE PATH. 1) On stopping the program, the source that the debugger tried to display could not be found. Check if the path connects to the source in the Debugger Option dialog box, or check if the source is in the same directory as the out file. Refer to the Assemble window on which the error message is displayed, and check if the corresponding path connects. Fb02f: Information has been deleted because of optimization. Ab030: Monitor timed out. 1) Check the power of the in-circuit emulator, cable connections, and setting of the interface board and restart the debugger. Ab031: Already set in memory. Ab032: Out of scope. Ab033: LP is not stored. Fb034: Return execution from present PC position cannot be performed. Fb037: Too Many Line-Numbers Information. Fb038: Compiler version mismatch. 1) Recreate the load module with the latest compiler. Ab039: Failed in loading debug information. Ab03a: No more section information. 352 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM APPENDIX E MESSAGES Fb040: Specified file is not load module. 1) This is not a linker output file. Source debug cannot be executed with the load module before output from the linker. Specify the load module output from the linker. Ab041: Too many files in load module to download. Wb042: Symbol module is not initialized. Fb32e: Illegal port number. Fb32f: Illegal port name. Fb330: Illegal port position. Fb331: Illegal increment number. Fb332: Port for memory bank is not set. Fb333: Illegal bank number. Fb334: Area for memory bank is not set. Wb335: Too long symbol name. (13) Xc000~ Fc001: Can not open file. 1) The file is damaged or does not exist. Recreate the file. Ac002: Can not close file. Ac003: Reading of file went wrong. 1) The file is damaged or does not exist. Recreate the file. Ac004: Reading of file went wrong. Fc005: Illegal file type. Fc006: Kind (Chip) of load module is illegal. Fc007: Specified file is not load module. 1) This is not a linker output file. Source debug cannot be executed with the load module before output from the linker. Specify the load module output from the linker. Fc008: Specified load module file (ELF) is old version. Ac009: Not enough memory. 1) There is not enough system memory. Close the applications being executed and the open files. Fc00a: No mapped address was accessed. Fc00b: Load module is not loaded. Fc00c: Illegal argument. Fc00d: User program is running. Fc00e: User program is being traced. Fc00f: Interrupted. Ac010: Can not communicate with ICE. Fc011: Illegal load module file format. User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 353 APPENDIX E MESSAGES Fc012: Check sum error. Fc013: Too wide address range to upload (> 1M byte). Fc014: Failed in writing file. 1) The file is damaged or does not exist. Recreate the file. Fc015: Illegal program number. Fc016: Load information is full. Wc017: Symbol information is duplicated, please reset symbols. Fc018:Specified file is not load module. 1) This is not a linker output file. Source debug cannot be executed with the load module before output from the linker. Specify the load module output from the linker. Fc019: Failed in writing memory. Wc01a: BSS area is assigned to non-mapped area. 1) When the program is executed, a non-map break may occur. Either allocate the BSS area to the internal RAM by using a CA link directive, or map the emulation memory or target memory to the BSS area using the Configuration dialog box of the debugger. Fc01b: Programmable-IOR address not specified. 1) Necessary files may be damaged. Reinstall the debugger. Wc01c: Programmable IOR address mismatch. 1) Necessary files may be damaged. Reinstall the debugger. Wc01d: Selected load module different from kind (Chip) was loaded. Fc101e: Flash erase is not supported on IECUBE. Fc100: This feature is not supported. (14) Xd000~ Ad000: Error occurred inside debugger. Ad001: Not enough memory. 1) There is not enough system memory. Close the applications being executed and the open files. Ad002: Failed in reading initialization file (expc.ini). Ad003: ICE is not connected. Fd004: Can not find Dynamic Link Library. (15) Xe000~ Fe000: Illegal argument. Fe001: Illegal start address. Fe002: Illegal end address. Fe003: Too large size. 354 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM APPENDIX E MESSAGES Fe004: Can not open file. 1) The file is damaged or does not exist. Recreate the file. Fe005: Failed in reading file. 1) The file is damaged or does not exist. Recreate the file. Fe006: Reading of file went wrong. Fe007: Failed in writing file. 1) The file is damaged or does not exist. Recreate the file. Ae008: Not enough memory. 1) There is not enough system memory. Close the applications being executed and the open files. Fe009: Illegal file format. Fe00a: Verification error. Fe010: This feature is not supported. (16) Xf000~ Af000: Not enough memory. 1) There is not enough system memory. Close the applications being executed and the open files. Ff000: Not enough memory. Ff001: [XXX] not found. Wf002: Not found [XXX]. Search from the beginning? Wf003: Already exceed search region. Ff004: Missing parameter. Ff005: Illegal function name. Ff006: Illegal number. Ff007: Start address is bigger than end address. Ff008: Illegal symbol or expression. Ff009: [XXX] This file is illegal type. Ff100: Disk cannot write or full. Ff101: File not found. Ff102: File not Create. Ff103: Old project file version. Ff104: Illegal project file format. Ff105: This file is a project file for [XXX].Please select a correct file. Wf106: CPU in the Project File was Changed. You must exit the debugger for the new CPU. Do you exit the Debugger? Wf107: CPU in the Project File was Changed. Do you start the Debugger with this CPU? Wf108: Selected project file different [YYY] from chip [XXX] was opened. Does it open, although the chip cannot be changed? User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 355 APPENDIX E MESSAGES Wf109: Project Manager cannot be used with the debugger of this version. Please use PMplus. Wf200: No difference encountered. Ff201: Memory mapping error. Ff202: Verify error. 1) External memory could not be accessed, as it is not set. Change the register values necessary for accessing the external memory using the IOR window or Hook Procedure before download . Wf203: When a program is running, while rewriting a memory, program execution stops for a moment. Do you wish to rewrite a memory? Wf300: Would you like to save the changes made in [XXX]? Ff301: The symbol being used on the event condition can't be evaluated. Wf302: Delete: [XXX] Wf303: [XXX] is edited. Delete: [YYY]? Wf304: [XXX] is edited. Save: [YYY]? Wf305: [XXX] is already exist. Do you replace it? Ff306: This name is too long. Ff307: There is the same name in other kinds. Ff308: An address can't be omitted. Ff309: Illegal address mask. Ff30a: Illegal data mask. Ff30b: Illegal ext probe mask. Ff30c: Illegal ext probe data. Ff30d: Illegal pass count. Ff30e: Illegal register name. Ff30f: Illegal register bank. Ff310: Illegal delay count. Wf311: Only one [XXX] can be enabled. Do you make this [YYY] to enable? Ff312: [XXX] is already there. Ff313: Event number already exist. Ff314: Event name is not set. Ff315: [XXX] is already there. Ff316: Max number of enabled [XXX] event is over. Please disable other enabled [YYY] event. Ff317: Max number of set event is over. Ff31e: Illegal start address. Ff31f: Illegal end address. Ff322: Illegal count rate. Ff323: Illegal time out break count. Ff324: Section and Qualify can be specified at the same time. 356 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM APPENDIX E MESSAGES Wf325: User program is running. Do you want to stop user program for a moment and set it? Wf326: User program is running. Do you want to stop user program for a moment and delete it? Ff350: There is a phase which event are not in the middle. Ff351: The same event is contained in Link and Disable. Ff352: An event isn't specified. Ff357: AND event is in Phase. Ff400: Coverage mapping error. Wf401: Clear coverage? Ff500: Illegal symbol. Ff501: Illegal value. Ff502: Illegal parameter. Ff503: Max number of symbol is over. Ff504: This variable cannot be set as a break. 1) Break cannot be set for the following variables. - Local variables, static variables - Array variables, member variables of structures/unions - Register/peripheral IOR - Variable expressions Wf600: Save project file? Wf601: When connecting the target system, please turn on the target system. 1) When a target is not connected, simply click the User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 357 APPENDIX E MESSAGES Ff603: Incorrect ID Code. 1) This may be caused by the following (when the N-Wire CARD is connected). - The ID code is incorrect. -> Input the correct ID code. - The internal flash memory is in the write mode because the FLMD0 pin is high. -> Make the FLMD0 pin low. - The emulator connection prohibition mode is set because the ID code (bit 7 of address 0x79) is 0. ->Erase the internal flash memory once. 2) This may be caused by the following (when the MINICUBE is connected). - The ID code is incorrect. -> Input the correct ID code. - The internal flash memory is in the write mode because the FLMD0 pin is high. -> Make the FLMD0 pin low. - The emulator connection prohibition mode is set because the ID code (bit 0,1 of address 0x84) is 0. ->Erase the internal flash memory once by flash writer. Af604 : Incorrect ID Code. Abort the debugger. 1) This may be caused by the following (when the N-Wire CARD is connected) - The ID code is incorrect. -> Input the correct ID code. - The internal flash memory is in the write mode because the FLMD0 pin is high. -> Make the FLMD0 pin low. - The emulator connection prohibition mode is set because the ID code (bit 7 of address 0x79) is 0. ->Erase the internal flash memory once. 2) This may be caused by the following (when the MINICUBE is connected). - The ID code is incorrect. -> Input the correct ID code. - The internal flash memory is in the write mode because the FLMD0 pin is high. -> Make the FLMD0 pin low. - The emulator connection prohibition mode is set because the ID code (bit 0,1 of address 0x84) is 0. ->Erase the internal flash memory once by flash writer. Ff606: Please check connection with the target board, and power on it. Wf607 : Please check connection of the exchange adapter. 1) Check the connection of the exchange adapter (EA). Recommend wearing of the exchange adapter, if the target is not connected. 358 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM APPENDIX E MESSAGES Ff608 : Please disconnect the target board. 1) A current may flow from the internal power supply to the target. Disconnect the target connector (TC) from the conversion adapter (EA). Review the setting in the Configuration dialog box if the target is not connected. Ff609: Please power off the target board, and disconnect it. Wf700: Do you want to download Load Module File? Wf701: Do you load symbol information only? Wf800: Configuration of Memory Bank is not set. Wf801: BANK address must be in target memory. Ff802: All events are deleted. because the use of external probe was changed. Ff803: This event address is invalid on current configuration. Ff804: Invalid PC value. Ff805: Cannot set temporary break on this address. Ff806: External data is being used by Debugger. Ff900: Illegal I/O port name. Ff901: Memory mapping error. 1) The specification of the address is illegal. Check the addresses that can be specified in the Add I/O Port dialog box. Ff902: Illegal access size. Ff903: Illegal access type. Ff904: There is the same name. Wf905: [XXX] is already exist. Do you replace it? Wf906: Would you like to register the change made in [XXX]? Ffa00: The [XXX] function of current program on PC position not found. 1) The symbol specified in main() label: in the Debugger Option dialog box could be found. Set a symbol of the main routine of the program. Default is _main. Ffa01: The line information on PC position not found. 1) The source file corresponding to program counter (PC) value when the program was stopped could not be found. The following reasons are possible. -The source file exists in a location that the source path does not connect to. -The program stopped where the source files, such as library or RX, do not exist. -The program looped, jumped to an address that is not used by the program, and stopped there. Wfb00: User program is running. Do you want to stop user program? 1) User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 359 APPENDIX E MESSAGES Ffc00: Online help window cannot be started. Please install HTML Help environment with reference to a users manual. Ffe00: The maximum size of RRM was exceeded. Wfe01: There is a duplicate RRM address. Wfe0b: It shift to the flash mode. Is it completely cleared but is the present event. Doesn't it care? Fffff: Interrupted. 360 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM APPENDIX F INDEX APPENDIX F INDEX A About dialog box ... 260 Access monitor ... 176 Access monitor function ... 58 Active status and static status ... 78 Add I/O Port dialog box ... 204 Add Watch dialog box ... 163 Address move dialog box ... 152 ASCII display ... 177 Assemble Search dialog box ... 150 Assemble window ... 146 B break break types ... 45 Breakpoint setting ... 46 setting break to variable ... 47 Break dialog box ... 247 Browse dialog box ... 265 step ... 303 stop ... 304 upload ... 305 version ... 306 watch ... 307 where ... 308 wish ... 309 xtime ... 310 xtrace ... 311 Command reference ... 267 Complement mode ... 64 Conditional trace ... 65 Configuration Dialog Box ... 100 Console window ... 262 Contents saved to project file ... 75 Context menu ... 87 C callback procedure ... 271 Cautions before starting ... 25 Change Watch dialog box ... 166 character set ... 329 clock ... 104 Come Here ... 51 command ... 262 address ... 275 assemble ... 276 batch ... 277 breakpoint ... 278 cache ... 280 command list ... 268 dbgexit ... 281 dbgopt ... 282 download ... 283 erase ... 284 extwin ... 285 finish ... 286 flop ... 287 go ... 288 help ... 289 hook ... 290 ie ... 291 inspect ... 292 jump ... 293 map ... 294 mdi ... 295 memory ... 296 module ... 297 next ... 298 refresh ... 299 register ... 300 reset ... 301 run ... 302 D Debug function list ... 37 Debugger Option dialog box ... 119 Delay Count dialog box ... 229 Delay trigger ... 227 Delay trigger trace ... 66 Disable condition ... 246 Displaying event details ... 232 division ratio and maximum measurement time (timer) ... 111 division ratio and maximum measurement time (trace) ... 109 DMA ... 63 DMM dialog box ... 190 Download ... 40 Download dialog box ... 130 Download Function / Upload Function ... 40 drag & drop function ... 81 E Environment Setting File Load Dialog Box ... 256 Environment Setting File Save Dialog Box ... 254 Error messages at start up ... 30 Errors ... 337 Event dialog box ... 239 Event function ... 67 Event manager area ... 69 Number of enabled events ... 70 Setting event ... 68 Various event conditions ... 67 Event icon ... 71 Event link dialog box ... 244 Event Manager ... 231 Event manages ... 70 Event Setting Status (Event Mark) ... 138 Exit Debugger dialog box ... 259 Expansion window ... 313 Expressions ... 331 Extended Option dialog box ... 108 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 361 APPENDIX F INDEX F fail-safe break ... 105 Fail-safe Break dialog box ... 114 flash memory ... 58 O Operating Environment ... 22 Operators ... 332 G -g option ... 23 H hook procedure ... 272 P PM plus ... 32 Point mark area ... 138, 147 program code ... 140 Program execution function ... 50 Programmable I/O ... 103 project file ... 74, 259 Project File Save dialog box ... 126 I I/O protect ... 38 ID code ... 23, 103 IECUBE ... 21 In-circuit emulator ... 22 input conventions ... 329 Installing ... 24 Internal RAM ... 38 Internal ROM ... 38 IOR Select dialog box ... 201 IOR window ... 197 Q Qualify trace ... 66, 227 Quick Watch dialog box ... 160 J jump function ... 79 L linking window ... 80 Load Module List dialog box ... 135 Load/Save Function ... 74 Local Variable window ... 168 R RAM monitor function ... 73 Range of Radixes ... 333 register clear ... 113 Register Select dialog box ... 195 Register Window ... 192 reset ... 258 Reset Debugger dialog box ... 258 right click menu ... 87 RRM dialog box ... 116 RRM function ... 72 Run-Break event ... 62 M Main window ... 88 Mapping settings ... 38 Mask ... 105 Memory Compare dialog box ... 186 Memory Compare Result dialog box ... 188 Memory Copy dialog box ... 184 Memory Fill dialog box ... 182 Memory manipulation function ... 56 Memory mapping ... 105 Memory Search dialog box ... 179 Memory window ... 175 Menu bar ... 88 Messages ... 337 Mixed display mode Source window ... 43 Trace window ... 65 S Section trace ... 66, 227 Security ID ... 23 Setting debugging environment ... 38 setting file ... 77 Software Break Manager ... 236 Source Search dialog box ... 142 Source Text move dialog box ... 144 Source window ... 137 Stack trace display function ... 55 Stack Trace window ... 171 Start From Here ... 51 Startup option ... 26 Startup Routine ... 123 Status Bar ... 97 Symbol To Address dialog box ... 153 N N-Wire CARD ... 21 N-Wire Checker ... 25, 321 T Target ... 38 Time out break ... 210 timer ... 111 Timer dialog box ... 207 Timer function ... 61 Timer Result dialog box ... 211 Timetag ... 213 Toolbar ... 95 Trace complement ... 64 trace data ... 110 362 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM APPENDIX F INDEX Trace Data Select dialog box ... 222 Trace dialog box ... 226 Trace function ... 63 trace memory ... 63 Trace mode ... 65 Trace move dialog box ... 224 Trace Search dialog box ... 217 trace timetag ... 109 Trace window ... 212 Tracer control mode ... 66 Types of Messages ... 337 Upload ... 41 Upload dialog box ... 133 V Verify check ... 113 view file ... 76 View File Load dialog box ... 252 View File Save dialog box ... 249 U Unconditional trace ... 65 Uninstalling ... 24 W Watch function ... 52 Watch window ... 155 window list ... 84 window reference ... 84 User's Manual U16973EJ1V0UM 363 |
Price & Availability of ID703000-QB
 |
|
|
|
|
All Rights Reserved © IC-ON-LINE 2003 - 2022 |
| [Add Bookmark] [Contact Us] [Link exchange] [Privacy policy] |
|
Mirror Sites : [www.datasheet.hk]
[www.maxim4u.com] [www.ic-on-line.cn]
[www.ic-on-line.com] [www.ic-on-line.net]
[www.alldatasheet.com.cn]
[www.gdcy.com]
[www.gdcy.net] |